Quarterlytics / Basic Materials / Construction Materials / Marshalls

Marshalls

mslh · LSE Basic Materials
Claim this profile
Ticker mslh
Exchange LSE
Sector Basic Materials
Industry Construction Materials
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2016 Annual Report · Marshalls
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Delivering growth

Marshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016

STRATEGIC REPORTDelivering growth 
through innovation

Our objective is to improve profitability and deliver 
long-term sustainable value for our shareholders whilst 
taking into account the interests of all stakeholders.

Find out more online 
www.marshalls.co.uk

Find us on Facebook 
MarshallsGroup

Follow us on Twitter  
@MarshallsGroup

Follow us on LinkedIn 
Marshalls

Follow us on YouTube  
MarshallsTV

Front cover: Brentford Market Place, Scout Moor and Moselden, Yorkstone

Page titleSTRATEGIC REPORTINNOVATION IN ACTION

A blend of 13  
of our stunning 
granites at Victoria 
Gate, Leeds

Victoria Gate is Leeds’ latest shopping and leisure 
destination. The £165 million development offers 
visitors a new shopping experience, with an 
abundance of shops, cafés and restaurants for 
visitors to enjoy. 

Strategic Report
02 

 Highlights

04  At a Glance

06 

Business Model

08  Chairman’s Statement

10  Chief Executive’s Statement

12  Markets

14 

16 

18 

20 

25 

29 

Strategy

Strategy in Action

Key Performance Indicators

 Risk Management and Principal Risks

Sustainability

Financial Review

Corporate Governance
Board of Directors and Secretary
34 

36  Corporate Governance Statement

42  Nomination Committee Report

44 

46 

49 

 Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

Remuneration Committee Report

Remuneration Policy

58  Annual Remuneration Report

66  Audit Committee Report

70 

 Directors’ Report – 
Other Regulatory Information

Financial Statements
78  Consolidated Income Statement

79 

 Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income

80  Consolidated Balance Sheet

81 

82 

84 

 Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

 Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

 Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

119 

 Parent Company Statement of Changes in Equity

120 

 Company Balance Sheet

121 

 Notes to the Company Financial Statements

72 

Independent Auditor’s Report

127 

 Financial History – Consolidated Group

129  Shareholder Information

01

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcSTRATEGIC REPORT

Highlights

Significant profit growth 
supported by operational 
efficiency initiatives

This has been another year of strong results for Marshalls, supported by the positive 
impact of manufacturing efficiency improvements. This has been matched by a 
strong cash performance and at 31 December 2016 the Group is cash positive.

Revenue £’m

£396.9m +3%

Operating profit £’m

£47.6m +27%

Profit before tax £’m

£46.0m +31%

16

15

14

13

12

396.9

386.2

358.5

307.4

300.9

16

15

14

13

25.3

16.1

12 12.9

47.6

37.5

16

15

14

13 13.0

12 9.3

22.4

46.0

35.3

Return on capital employed %

EPS p

23.0% +21%

18.95p +32%

Final dividend recommended p

5.80p +22%

23.0

19.0

16

15

14

13

12.5

8.1

18.95

14.32

16

15

14

13

10.13

6.94

12 5.7

12

5.52

16

15

14

13

12

5.80

3.00

4.75

2.00

4.00

3.50

3.50

(+ 3.00p supplementary)

Total dividend –  
ordinary and supplementary p

11.70p +30%

02

Marshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016INNOVATION IN STREET FURNITURE

Metrolinia 
flexible seating 
configurations

A contemporary and flexible range 
that comprises a number of different 
seating options, giving you the 
flexibility not only to play with colour 
and texture but also with almost 
unlimited configurations.

New products revenue growth of

10%

Financial highlights
 • Revenue up 3% to £396.9 million (2015: £386.2 million)

 • Strong profit before tax growth of 31% to £46.0 million 

(2015: £35.3 million) driven by improved operating margins 
to 12.0% (2015: 9.7%)

 • Return on capital employed (“ROCE”) improved 21% 

(400 basis points) to 23.0% (2015: 19.0%)

 • EPS up 32% to 18.95 pence (2015: 14.32 pence)

Good progress has been 
made in the year to deliver 
the 2020 Strategy and the 
self help programme to 
support organic growth 
is well advanced.

 • Final ordinary dividend increased by 22% to 5.80 pence 

Martyn Coffey, Chief Executive

(2015: 4.75 pence) per share

 • Supplementary dividend of 3.00 pence per share

 • Strong sales and order intake since the year end

The 2020 Strategy
 • Grow EBITDA, improve ROCE and strengthen our brand

 • Promote self help investment and growth initiatives

 • Prioritise organic capital investment

 • Commit further investment to research and development

 • Focus on innovation and new product development to 

drive sales growth

 • Focus on increasing the profitability of the Smaller UK Businesses

 • Advance the development of a wide-ranging digital strategy

 • Target selective bolt-on acquisition opportunities

  Strategy pages 14 – 16

  Key performance indicators pages 18 – 19

03

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcAt a Glance

The UK’s leading hard 
landscaping manufacturer

Marshalls΄ principal aim is to increase value by creating better spaces. We place 
a strong emphasis on product innovation and service delivery initiatives.

Who we are and what we do

Public Sector and Commercial
Interiors, gardens,  
seating and landscapes

Marshalls is the leading innovator of hard landscaping 
solutions for the commercial construction sector, placing 
a focus on developing new and innovative products.

Marshalls focuses on developing products which help 
architects, local authorities and contractors to create better 
spaces, whether it is street furniture, natural stone paving 
for the internal or external environment, concrete block 
paving, water management or protective street 
furniture products.

Customers
Local authorities, commercial architects, specifiers, 
contractors, housebuilders and builders merchants.

Products
Paving, block paving, kerb, water management, 
natural stone cladding, street furniture, lighting, 
protective street furniture, walling and mortars.

Domestic
Interiors, gardens  
and driveways

Marshalls’ Domestic customers range from DIY 
enthusiasts to professional landscapers, driveway 
installers and garden designers. Sales continue to be 
driven through the Marshalls Register of Accredited 
Landscapers and Driveway Installers. 

For homeowners, Marshalls offers the inspiration they 
need for their garden and driveway projects.

Customers
National and independent builders merchants, 
DIY groups, professional landscapers, garden designers 
and patio and driveway installers.

Products
Paving, block paving, paths, edgings, walling and 
decorative aggregates.

  Markets – Public Sector and Commercial pages 12–13

  Markets – Domestic pages 12–13

04

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016INNOVATION IN CONCRETE PAVING

Paving with 
integrated Water 
Management

Complementary drainage products 
can be integrated into a paving design 
to delineate or blend in order to create 
a cohesive, free-flowing public space.

New products revenue growth of

10%

What makes us different

Our customer service
The Group’s national network of manufacturing 
and regional centres makes Marshalls the only truly 
national supplier. We maintain industry-leading standards 
of product quality, availability and “on-time” delivery. 

Our quality
The Group remains committed to producing new 
quality products that are better than any existing 
market offering.

Our technical expertise
The Group is committed to excellence and 
our skilled engineers and technicians provide 
competitive advantage. Marshalls has a world-class 
Manufacturing, Innovation and Development team.

Our production innovation
The Group’s commitment to innovation and the 
development of new products and solutions provides 
an industry-leading new product design pipeline.

Our capital structure
The Group has a strong balance sheet and a clear 
capital allocation strategy. Our capital structure 
is aligned with the strategic objectives.

Our standards
The Group is a benchmark for excellence and a leader 
in its field. Marshalls has been rated a Business 
Superbrand every year since 2010. Superbrands is 
an annual initiative to identify and celebrate Britain’s 
strongest consumer and business-to-business brands.

05

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcBusiness Model

How we do business

Marshalls is the UK’s leading hard landscaping manufacturer supplying 
superior natural stone and innovative concrete products to the construction, 
home improvement and landscape markets since the 1890s.

Resources and 
relationships

Intellectual
Innovation
• 

•  Technical expertise

•  Brand

Human
•  Our people

Relationships
•  Supply chain

•  Customers

Financial
•  Prudent capital structure

Manufacture 
•  Efficient plants

•  National coverage

Natural
•  Mineral reserves

Responding to 
the wider market
Marshalls seeks to understand the 
long-term drivers of market and product 
growth. Through detailed market analysis, 
we continue to drive new product 
development, particularly in the areas 
of Infrastructure, Water Management, Street 
Furniture, Rail and New Build Housing. 
The Group tracks trends in lifestyles and 
aesthetics as well as developing solutions 
to ensure that products can be efficiently 
and effectively installed. Product 
development focuses on meeting 
consumer needs and on increasing the 
speed and efficiency of product installation.

How we operate

Sourcing
The Group’s main raw materials are cement, 
sand, aggregates, pigments, fuel oil and 
utilities. We use the best materials we can 
source. Supply chain relationships include 
the ethical sourcing of natural stone from 
India, China and Vietnam. The Group also 
has extensive reserves of UK natural stone.

RELATED RISKS
•  Macro-economic and political

•  Cost and availability of raw materials

•  Cyber security risks

•  Environmental

Manufacturing
The Group manufactures and supplies landscape, 
driveway and garden products from a range of 
materials, principally concrete and natural stone. 
Marshalls has a world-class Manufacturing, 
Innovation and Development team.

RELATED RISKS
•  Competitor activity

•  Threat from new technologies 

and business models

• 

IT infrastructure

•  Legal and regulatory

Our strengths

Customer service
• 

Industry-leading standards

Quality 
•  Commitment to 

•  Quality, availability and 

“on-time” delivery

producing new quality 
products that are better 
than any existing 
market offering

•  Development of 
a digital strategy

Technical expertise
•  World-class 

Manufacturing, Innovation 
and Development team

•  Skilled engineers 
and technicians 

Our values

Leadership

Excellence

Strategic objectives:  

 Shareholder value   

 Relationship building   

 Brand development   

 Sustainable profitability   

 Organic expansion   

 Effective capital structure and control framework

06

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
Distribution
Due to the scale of our operations, 
and our national network of regional 
centres, 97 per cent of our customers 
are less than 2 hours away. This continues 
to be a key competitive advantage.

Customers
Our customers range from Domestic 
homeowners to Public Sector and 
Commercial. We seek to exceed the 
expectations of customers in all  
our markets.

RELATED RISKS
•  Macro-economic and political

RELATED RISKS
•  Macro-economic and political

• 

IT infrastructure

•  Cost inflation

•  Environmental

•  Weather

•  Cyber security risks

•  Legal and regulatory

Product innovation
•  New and innovative 

Setting the standards
•  Benchmark for excellence, 

Strong capital structure
•  Strong balance sheet

products

•  Patent protection

•  Machinery design 
and installation

widely regarded as a 
leader in its field

•  Clear capital 

allocation strategy

•  Marshalls is one of Britain’s 
strongest Superbrands

•  Sustainability credentials

•  Capital structure aligned 

with the Group’s 
strategic objectives

Trust

Sustainability

Stakeholder value

Shareholders
•  Progressive dividend policy

•  Targeting 2 times dividend 
cover over business cycle

People
•  Employee engagement

•  Promote development and 

personal growth 

•  Living wage company

Customers
•  Centre of business model

•  Quality products and  
exceptional service

Communities
•  Business in the Community

•  Responsible business practices

The business
•  Reinvestment (research and 

development, capital expenditure)

•  Drive growth and sustainability

07

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcChairman’s Statement

Our vision is to 
establish a world-class 
hard landscape business

Our objective is to improve profitability 
and deliver long-term sustainable value 
for our shareholders whilst taking into 
account the interests of all stakeholders.

Summary
 • Core values remain leadership, excellence, 

trust and sustainability.

 • 32% increase in earnings per share reflecting 
continuing strength of the Marshalls brand.

 • Strong balance sheet and prudent capital 

structure.

 • Full-year dividend of 8.70 pence (up 24%) 

and a discretionary supplementary dividend 
of 3.00 pence.

08

Overview
I am pleased to report that Marshalls has made continued progress 
during 2016 and delivered strong results. Profit before tax has 
increased by 31 per cent during the year with strong operational 
gearing supported by the positive impact of improvements in 
operational and manufacturing efficiency. 

The Group’s core values of leadership, excellence, trust and 
sustainability continue to support our strategic objectives, which 
remain unchanged. Our primary objective is to improve profitability 
and to deliver long-term sustainable value for our shareholders whilst 
taking into account the interests of all our stakeholders. 

The continuing development of Marshalls’ corporate culture is a key 
theme for 2017 and is closely aligned with the Group’s core values. 
Following the Financial Reporting Council’s paper your Board has 
reviewed its role in respect of culture and established a more formal 
framework to ensure culture is a clear area of ongoing focus for 
the Group. A healthy and positive corporate culture, supported 
by a consistent approach and strategic message from the Board, 
will both protect and generate shareholder value.

Results
Marshalls’ revenue is up 3 per cent to £396.9 million. The Domestic 
end market performance has been particularly strong with revenue 
growth of 10 per cent during the year. Profit before tax was £46.0 million 
(2015: £35.3 million) and EBITDA has grown by 17 per cent to £60.8 million 
(2015: £51.8 million). The Group’s earnings per share at 18.95 pence are 
up 32 per cent. These results reflect the continuing strength of the 
Marshalls brand, our emphasis on customer service and our 
enduring objective of providing innovative, quality products and 
integrated solutions. 

Dividends
Marshalls has strong cash generation and a robust balance sheet 
which underpins our progressive dividend policy. The Group maintains 
the objective of 2 times dividend cover over the business cycle. 

The Group’s core values of leadership, 
excellence, trust and sustainability continue 
to support our strategic objectives.

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016The Board is recommending a final dividend of 5.80 pence 
(2015: 4.75 pence) per share which, together with the interim dividend 
of 2.90 pence (2015: 2.25 pence) per share, makes a total ordinary 
dividend for the year of 8.70 pence (2015: 7.00 pence) per share.

Given the strong performance in the year, the Board is also recommending 
a supplementary dividend of 3.00 pence per share (2015: 2.00 pence). 
This supplementary dividend is discretionary and non-recurring. 
It recognises the Board’s objective of maintaining an efficient 
and prudent capital structure and providing increased returns 
for shareholders whilst at the same time retaining flexibility 
for capital and other investment opportunities.

of the business and seek to improve the effectiveness of the Board 
as a whole and of individual Directors. No areas of material concern 
were highlighted as a result of the 2016 evaluation.

Under our remuneration policy, executive remuneration is closely 
linked to performance and the achievement of stretching financial 
and strategic targets that are closely aligned with the Group’s strategic 
objectives. These include specific customer service and health and 
safety targets. Management continues to receive a large proportion 
of its remuneration in shares which must be retained for up to 5 years. 
This ensures a strong alignment between the interests of management 
and our shareholders. 

Strategy
Our vision is to establish Marshalls as a world-class hard landscape 
business and in formulating the Group’s strategy the objective is to 
deliver sustainable growth in shareholder value whilst taking into 
consideration the interests of all our stakeholders and the wider 
contribution we make to society. The Group’s culture is to create open, 
rewarding and transparent relationships across all key stakeholders. 

Board changes
Alan Coppin retired from the Board following the Annual General 
Meeting in May 2016 having served as Non-Executive Director, Senior 
Independent Director and Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
since May 2010. Following Alan’s retirement from the Board, Janet 
Ashdown was appointed Senior Independent Director and Chair 
of the Remuneration Committee.

The key elements of the Group’s strategy include further development 
of the Marshalls brand, the introduction of new and innovative products, 
excellent customer service, operational improvement and improving 
the performances of the smaller businesses. The Group’s capital 
structure continues to support our strategic objectives whilst also 
reflecting the economic and sector background. Given the cyclical 
nature of our sector, a conservative financial profile remains appropriate 
for Marshalls. The Group’s capital allocation policy has 3 supporting 
principles, which are security, flexibility and efficiency. We continue 
to support a prudent capital structure and at 31 December 2016 
I am pleased to report that the Group has become cash positive.

Governance
We continue to comply with the UK Corporate Governance Code as 
outlined in our Corporate Governance Statement on pages 36 to 41. 
The Board remains committed to the highest standards of corporate 
governance and to strong ethical and professional practices. In 2016, 
Marshalls has again been awarded the “Fair Tax Mark” for responsible 
tax behaviour and transparency in its tax affairs.

The Group continues to enhance the Annual Report disclosures to 
ensure they represent a fair, balanced and understandable assessment 
of the Group’s position and prospects. We hope this year’s Annual 
Report provides further improvements for shareholders. 

The Board action plan for 2016 included further consideration of 
longer-term strategic planning, risk management and business 
resilience. Additional consideration has also been given to Board 
succession planning along with greater focus on succession 
planning below Board level. I am pleased to report that we have 
made good progress against our action plan, which is reported in 
more detail in the Corporate Governance Report on pages 36 to 41. 
The Board continues to maintain an open and transparent culture where 
all Board members are able to contribute effectively and without 
constraint to discussions. 

Board development continues to be a priority and during the year 
an external evaluation of Board performance was undertaken by an 
independent evaluator. Such reviews recognise the changing needs 

People
Marshalls has an outstanding workforce and I would like to thank 
all our employees for their professionalism and ongoing support, 
commitment and dedication to Marshalls. 

We continue to promote a pay and rewards structure that recognises 
performance and that is fair to all employees. Marshalls continues to 
exceed the “Living Wage Employer” criteria. The Group is establishing 
a new defined contribution pension scheme within a market leading 
Master Trust operated by Aviva/Friends Life. This will be fair, flexible 
and fit for the future and will create a framework that will provide a 
much improved pension proposition going forward that will benefit 
all employees.

The Marshalls 2015 Sharesave Scheme encourages wider ownership 
of Marshalls plc shares across the entire workforce, which ensures 
that the interests of employees remain firmly aligned with those 
of shareholders. 

Outlook
The underlying indicators have remained supportive in Marshalls’ 
main end markets while order intake, revenue growth and cash 
generation have remained robust. The Board is mindful of market 
volatility and the more cautious growth levels highlighted by recent 
Construction Products Association forecasts, but continues to support 
the growth objectives and operational priorities that remain central 
to our 2020 Strategy. 

Marshalls has a strong balance sheet and your Board believes that the 
Group’s innovative product range and strong market positions mean 
it is well placed to deliver continued growth and operational profit 
improvements as it implements its 2020 Strategy. Sales and order 
intake have been strong in the first couple of months of 2017.

Andrew Allner
Chairman

09

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcChief Executive’s Statement

Delivering 
growth

The Group’s strategic priorities are to 
promote the growth initiatives of our 
2020 Strategy and to drive through 
sustainable cost reductions and 
improvements in operational efficiency.

Summary
 • Profit before tax up 31% to £46.0 million 

with significant benefits from operational 
efficiency initiatives.

 • Strong cash generation with positive cash 

of £5.4 million at the year end.

 • Continuing investment in new 

product development.

 • Commitment to self help capital 

investment programme.

 • Digital strategy development progressing well.

10

Introduction
The Group has delivered significant profit growth in 2016, with the 
underlying indicators remaining positive in Marshalls’ main end markets. 
Revenue growth has remained robust, and sales continued strongly 
during the last quarter of the year. It is also pleasing to report that 
sales and order intake have been strong in the first couple of months 
of 2017. 

Good progress has been made in the year to deliver the 2020 Strategy 
and the self help programme to support organic growth is well advanced. 
The drive for sustainable operational improvements is proving successful 
as evidenced by the margin improvements in the year. As a result of 
our continued focus on strategic growth and operational efficiency 
initiatives, the Group has delivered an operating profit in 2016 of 
£47.6 million (2015: £37.5 million), an increase of 27 per cent. 

The Marshalls brand remains central to our strategy and the Group 
has again received “Superbrand” status for 2017. The Group has an 
increasingly strong market position and we continue to benefit from 
our leading, trusted brand with clear values and excellent environmental 
credentials. Marshalls remains a benchmark for excellence and our 
3 cornerstone themes of customer service, quality and sustainability 
continue to put the customer at the very heart of our business.

2016 trading summary
Marshalls’ revenue for the year ended 31 December 2016 was up 
3 per cent at £396.9 million (2015: £386.2 million). 

Sales to the Domestic end market, which represent 31 per cent of 
Group sales, were up 10 per cent for the year compared with 2015. 
Domestic sales growth was particularly strong in the second half of 
the year increasing by 14 per cent in this period. The survey of 
domestic installers at the end of February 2017 revealed order books 
of 10.9 weeks (2016: 10.5 weeks), which compares with 11.7 weeks 
at the end of June 2016. 

Sales to the Public Sector and Commercial end market represent 
64 per cent of Marshalls’ sales and, as previously reported, were 
broadly in line with the prior year. However, based on public indicators 
we believe we continue to outperform our peers and gain market share.

The core Commercial and Domestic businesses continue to deliver 
benefits from operational gearing and our network of manufacturing 
sites remains a key competitive strength. The performance of our Smaller 
UK Businesses has continued to improve during 2016 and collectively 
they have delivered profit growth of 13 per cent. These businesses 
include Street Furniture, Mineral Products and Stone Cladding. 

International revenue has grown by 2 per cent during 2016 and 
represents approximately 5 per cent of Group sales. Marshalls has made 

The Group has delivered significant 
profit growth in 2016, with the underlying 
indicators remaining positive in Marshalls’ 
main end markets.

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016continued progress in developing the International business although 
the market background in mainland Europe remains subdued. During 
the early part of 2016 we opened a sales office in Dubai to facilitate 
further sales growth in the Middle East and the Group continues to 
improve its global infrastructure, supply chains and routes to market.

Profit before tax increased by 31 per cent to £46.0 million 
(2015: £35.3 million) and EBITDA increased by 17 per cent to £60.8 million 
(2015: £51.8 million). Basic EPS was 18.95 pence (2015: 14.32 pence), 
an increase of 32 per cent. 

Significant cash generation has seen the Group deliver a cash positive 
position of £5.4 million at 31 December 2016, which compares with 
net debt of £11.5 million at 31 December 2015.

Current priorities and operational strategy
The Group’s strategy is to grow the business, deliver increasing operating 
margins in all businesses and improve the Group’s return on capital 
employed (“ROCE”). 

The Group’s operating margin has increased from 9.7 per cent to 
12.0 per cent during the year. ROCE is defined as EBITA / shareholders’ 
funds plus cash / net debt and was 23.0 per cent for the year ended 
31 December 2016, which represents an increase of 21 per cent 
compared with the prior year. 

Looking ahead, the Group’s strategic priorities continue to be the 
growth initiatives of our 2020 Strategy and to drive through further 
sustainable cost reductions and improvements in operational efficiency. 
Capital expenditure of £20 million is targeted for 2017, including 
£6 million of additional self help investment. A good pipeline of 
performance improving projects has been identified that will drive 
this growth. In addition, further increases in research and new product 
development expenditure are planned. 

Targeted bolt-on acquisitions also remain a key part of the 2020 Strategy, 
specifically within our identified focus sectors of Water Management, 
Street Furniture and Minerals. However, given greater market uncertainty, 
our approach remains cautious. Any proposed acquisition target will be 
carefully selected against strict criteria and will be thoroughly considered 
during detailed due diligence. Any acquisitions would be funded by 
operational cash flow and the Group’s bank facilities. 

Marshalls’ operational priorities continue to focus on service, quality, 
design, innovation and sustainability and the Group continues to extend 
its product range and provide more integrated product solutions. The 
objective is to improve the customer experience and further differentiate 
and strengthen the Marshalls brand by ensuring a consistently high 
standard of quality and customer service. Marshalls continues to have 
customer service as a key KPI and maintains industry-leading standards of 
product quality, availability and “on-time” delivery. Our combined customer 
service measure continued to be in excess of 98 per cent throughout 2016.

Marshalls’ Digital Strategy remains a key priority and further investment 
is being directed to enhance capability and digital support throughout 
the business, combining digital trading, digital marketing and digital 
business. Web and mobile applications now enable customers to 
model their requirements, allow digital access to the registered 
installer base and allow real-time visibility of stock.

Innovation and new product development
In the core Landscape Products business, revenue from new products 
increased by 10 per cent during 2016. The development pipeline 
continues to be strong and the Group remains committed to 
increasing the resources and investment that will drive further 
innovation and new product development. The growth in new 
products and the development of new manufacturing processes 
are evidenced by the increase in the number of patents being taken 
out by the business and we currently have 8 patents pending. 
Particular focus is given to those businesses with the greatest growth 
opportunity and development expenditure includes project engineering 
to enhance manufacturing capabilities, concrete and other material 
technology innovations and the extension of the new product pipeline. 
For example, the Group’s Drexus linear drainage system, along with 
other new sustainable water management systems, demonstrates 
our innovative thinking in relation to the reduction of flood risk. 

Improvements in operational efficiency
We are continuing to focus on improving operational and manufacturing 
efficiency. The Group adopts a flexible operating framework that focuses 
on employee accountability, process repeatability and plant reliability. 
In the UK, the Group has a unique manufacturing network of 13 concrete 
manufacturing sites as well as quarries producing paving, walling 
and cladding products, making Marshalls the only truly national 
supplier. Our national geographic coverage continues to provide 
strong competitive advantage and the implementation of best 
practice across the entire network continues to be a priority. All the 
Group’s operations are supported by a centrally managed logistics 
and distribution capability. 

Manufactured products from this network are combined with 
ethically sourced natural stone products imported from India, China 
and Vietnam and are supplied to distributors’ depots or direct to site. 
The growth of the Group’s vitrified ceramic range is a further example 
of the increasing range of new product solutions and the range of 
materials we can provide. Marshalls is also focusing on improving 
efficiency within the supply chain to ensure sustainable business 
continuity and cost control. This includes the development of flexible 
strategies that can accommodate change within the supply chain. 
Well invested capital equipment provides the flexibility to 
manufacture products for both the Public Sector and Commercial 
and the Domestic end markets and enhancing this operational 
flexibility also remains a key priority. 

Health and safety
The Group remains committed to improving the quality and safety of 
the working environment by maintaining the highest health and safety 
standards. Health and safety remains a cornerstone of the Group’s 
culture and our focus continues to be aligned with an increasingly 
rigorous regulatory framework.

During 2016, there was a 20 per cent reduction in days lost from 
workplace incidents, which is comfortably ahead of the Group’s 
headline target. The Group has continued to invest in health and 
safety awareness training for all managers and supervisory staff 
through its “Visible Felt Leadership” initiative. 

The Group’s strategic initiatives are set out in detail in the Strategic 
Report on pages 14 to 17.

Martyn Coffey
Chief Executive

11

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcMarkets

Serving the market

Marshalls’ marketing team constantly tracks the key market indicators and 
drivers to ensure that the organisation is able to quickly and effectively 
react to current and future changes in the market environment.

MARKET TREND
Recovery in total UK construction 
output to pre-recession levels
Construction output is expected to grow by 0.8 per cent in 2017 
and 0.7 per cent in 2018 according to the latest forecasts by the 
CPA. In addition, construction output is expected to grow by 
2.2 per cent in 2019. However, this growth masks a considerable 
degree of variation in the fortunes of the key construction 
sectors and sub-sectors.

MARKET TREND
Changes in the Government 
construction pipeline
Public sector spending represents around 25 per cent to 
30 per cent of the total UK construction market, and the current 
published data indicates that 3 sectors will dominate public 
projects over the course of the current spending review. 
These sectors are Energy, Transport and Public Housing. 

CPA all work winter 2016 value forecast

Government construction pipeline £’m

£170,000

£160,000

£150,000

£140,000

£130,000

£120,000

£110,000

£100,000

2016/17

2017/18

2018/19

2019/20

2020/21

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016 

2017

2018

2019 

£0

£10,000

£20,000

£30,000

£40,000

£50,000

£60,000

£70,000

  Actual

  Lower

  Mid

  Upper

 Communications   

 CPS   

 Education   

 Energy   

 Flood Defence   

 Health  

 Home Office   

 Housing and Regeneration   

 Justice   

 Ministry of Defence 

 Police Forces   

 Science and Research   

 Transport   

 Utilities   

 Waste 

OUR RESPONSE – 2020 STRATEGY
•  Marshalls will continue to analyse the individual market sectors and 

OUR RESPONSE – 2020 STRATEGY
•  Marshalls will continue to focus on these growth sectors. 

sub-sectors to focus the organisation on those areas with sustainable 
growth. This analysis will drive innovation and the introduction of new 
products and propositions. The digital strategy will drive development.

•  Ongoing focus on those market areas where future demand 

is considered to be greatest.

•  This will continue to drive new product development in the 

areas of Infrastructure, Rail and New Build Housing.

LONG-TERM STRATEGIC RESPONSE
•  Marshalls’ analysis goes further than the base forecasts and seeks 

to understand the long-term drivers of market and product growth.

•  The FutureSpaces analysis ties together macro trends with core 
market indicators to enable effective targeting of resources.

LONG-TERM STRATEGIC RESPONSE
•  The Government’s construction pipeline also shows the growth 
in spending on areas such as flooding which is met by Marshalls’ 
Water Management products which will also benefit from a 
focus on climate change mitigation.

Find out more online 
www.marshalls.co.uk/futurespaces

Find out more online 
www.marshalls.co.uk/rail

12

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016FIND OUT MORE

  Strategy pages 14 – 15

  Financial Review pages 29 – 33

MARKET TREND
New housebuilding
New housebuilding generally represents around 20 per cent 
to 25 per cent of the total UK construction market and in 2007 
the Government set an annual target of building 240,000 new 
homes per annum. The recent housing white paper confirmed 
the need to significantly increase UK new housebuilding. 

MARKET TREND
Domestic installer order books
Marshalls carries out a survey of Domestic installer order books 
regularly throughout the year and in 2016 has seen levels 
that average around 11 weeks, considerably higher than the 
pre-recession average of around 9 weeks. 

Housing units cumulative shortfall since 
Government target set in 2007

Domestic installer order books

800,000

700,000

600,000

500,000

400,000

300,000

200,000

100,000

0

s
k
e
e
w

f

o
r
e
b
m
u
n
e
g
a
r
e
v
A

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

Jan 2006

Jan 2007

Jan 2008

Jan 2009

Jan 2010

Jan 2011

Jan 2012

Jan 2013

Jan 2014

Jan 2015

Jan 2016

Jan 2017

OUR RESPONSE – 2020 STRATEGY
•  Marshalls have 4 product categories that cover 

the new housebuilding market.

•  The core landscaping product range of Domestic drives and 
patios, the Commercial infrastructure products, Natural Stone 
and Reconstituted Walling and Mortars.

OUR RESPONSE – 2020 STRATEGY
•  Marshalls operates the UK’s largest approved garden and 

driveway installers scheme. This is focused on customer service, 
quality and sustainability.

•  This links consumers to landscape installers that have been assessed 
trained and monitored by Marshalls to ensure the highest standards 
of installation, giving the consumer peace of mind.

LONG-TERM STRATEGIC RESPONSE
•  New product development for both the Domestic homeowner 
and Commercial new housebuilder markets will continue to 
track trends in lifestyles and aesthetics and ensure that 
products can be efficiently and effectively installed.

LONG-TERM STRATEGIC RESPONSE
•  Marshalls’ product development continues to focus not only 

on meeting consumer needs but also on increasing the speed 
of installation to enable installers to become more productive 
and efficient.

Find out more online 
www.marshalls.co.uk/home

Find out more online 
www.marshalls.co.uk/homeowners

13

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plc 
 
 
Strategy

Focused on growth

Continuing emphasis on customer service and our enduring objective 
of providing quality products and integrated solutions. Delivering growth 
through product innovation is a key element of the Group’s strategy.

Shareholder value
To deliver sustainable 
shareholder value by improving 
the long-term operating 
performance of the business.

Sustainable profitability
To maintain a strong market 
position and grow the business 
profitability in all the Group’s 
end markets.

Relationship building
To develop relationships 
with key stakeholders, 
customers and installers.

WHAT WE HAVE ACHIEVED
•  Growth in ROCE to 23.0 per cent.

WHAT WE HAVE ACHIEVED
•  27 per cent growth in operating profit 

WHAT WE HAVE ACHIEVED
•  Strengthened customer relationships.

•  Market share gains.

•  Supplementary dividend.

driven by sustainable efficiency 
improvements.

• 

Increase in operating profit percentage 
to 12.0 per cent (2015: 9.7 per cent).

•  10 per cent growth in sales of new 

products in the core business.

•  98 per cent customer service KPI.

• 

Integrated “landscaping solutions”. 

•  Design Space office in Central London.

•  Almost 2,000 registered installer teams.

Growth in ROCE to

23.0%

New products growth of

10%

Registered installer teams now

approx. 2,000

2020 STRATEGY
•  To strengthen the Marshalls brand by 
developing systems-based solutions.

2020 STRATEGY
•  To deliver new and innovative 

product solutions.

2020 STRATEGY
•  To promote integrated product solutions.

•  To focus on installer training, marketing 

•  To make strategic investments for 
organic growth and acquisitions.

•  To improve operational efficiency 

and sales support.

of manufacturing and distribution network.

•  To develop the supply chain and maintain 

•  To have a progressive dividend policy.

•  To drive through sustainable 

ethical and sustainable policies.

cost reductions.

•  To be a provider of integrated 

•  To invest in the digital strategy.

solutions and systems.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  To grow EBITDA and ROCE.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  To deliver sustainable EPS and 
operating cash flow growth.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  To increase market share in our Smaller 
UK Businesses and to be an employer 
of choice.

14

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016FIND OUT MORE

  Key performance indicators pages 18 – 19

  Risks pages 20 – 24

  Sustainability pages 25 – 28

  Remuneration pages 46 – 65

Organic expansion
To invest in selective synergistic 
acquisitions and organic 
expansion in existing and related 
markets and product categories 
to expand the business.

Brand development
To strengthen and extend the 
Marshalls brand by focusing on 
innovation, service and new 
product development.

Effective capital structure 
and control framework
To maintain efficient and 
effective business controls and to 
ensure that the capital structure 
remains aligned with the Group’s 
corporate growth objectives.

WHAT WE HAVE ACHIEVED
•  Revenue growth of 3 per cent 

to £396.9 million.

WHAT WE HAVE ACHIEVED
•  “Superbrand” status.

WHAT WE HAVE ACHIEVED
•  Strong balance sheet.

•  Continued development 

•  Cash positive at 31 December 2016.

•  Significant growth in key focus areas 

of Marshalls brand.

and Smaller UK Businesses.

•  Developed product range whilst 
maintaining operational flexibility.

•  Opened a sales office in Dubai.

• 

Improved integration of 
marketing collateral.

•  Provision of innovative, quality products.

•  Continued focus on working capital 

Revenue 

£396.9m

R&D investment of

£3.4m

2020 STRATEGY
•  To focus on increasing the profitability 

2020 STRATEGY
•  To focus on innovation, customer 

of the Smaller UK Businesses.

service and product quality.

•  To target growth areas such 

•  To increase technical R&D. 

as Water Management, Street Furniture, 
Rail and New Build Housing.

•  To maintain the highest health 

and safety standards.

•  To increase capital expenditure 
investment for organic growth.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  To maintain a national network of 

manufacturing and distribution sites. 

•  To develop our global supply chains 

and infrastructure.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  To maintain the Group’s 
market-leading position.

•  Efficient portfolio of bank facilities 
with extended maturities and 
realigned headroom. 

management and efficient 
inventory control.

Cash positive at year end

£5.4m

2020 STRATEGY
•  To maintain a flexible capital structure 
that recognises cyclical risk, focusing 
on security, efficiency and liquidity.

•  To deliver a capital allocation 

strategy that is fully aligned with this 
capital structure.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  To operate tight control over business, 
operational and financial procedures.

•  To target a net debt to EBITDA ratio 
of between 1 and 2 times over the 
business cycle.

15

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcStrategy in Action

Innovation and new 
product development

Our innovation cycle
The structure of the Marshalls Innovation Cycle 
gives us a greater ability to feed the Group Marketing 
Evolution Plan – a necessity for a healthy, sustainable 
and industry-leading new product design 
(“NPD”) pipeline. 

The structure enables us to plug dynamically into 
a wider intelligence of product ideas, market drivers, 
industry technology and manufacturing system 
and process improvements for the next generation 
of Marshalls NPD. 

Product and process concepts will be developed in 
consultation with stakeholders and brought to life 
and managed within the innovation growth engine. 
Based on real commercial intelligence the best 
concepts will be prioritised by business leaders and 
will move forward with more speed and confidence 
before being managed through the manufacturing 
or marketing process prior to manufacture.

INTELLIGENCE

Future  
Spaces 

Market 
intelligence 

Technology 
drivers

Materials  
R&D

Sales  
feedback

INNOVATION

Innovation growth engine

Idea portfolio

DELIVERY

Investment

Product management

Manufacture

INNOVATION IN CONCRETE PAVING

Premium and 
streamlined 
driveway style

A sharp contemporary look with 
the distinctive streamlined shape 
of Driveline Metro, lightly washed 
to expose the aggregate and give 
a premium finish. The design mixes 
4 carefully selected colour options.

New products revenue growth of

10%

16

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Digital strategy

Over the last decade technology and software advancements have rapidly 
driven change in many industries. Many are calling this the next industrial 
revolution. All companies face the challenge of how best to utilise digital 
technology to transform their business and Marshalls is no exception. 

Approach
Marshalls understands that creative digital solutions need to be 
developed on strong foundations. Therefore our approach to 
implementing a successful digital strategy is to tackle 3 key elements: 
Infrastructure, Systems and Processes and Customer Touchpoints. 

Infrastructure: Predominantly technical projects that help create a 
sustainable architecture and an agile platform for all digital initiatives.

Systems and processes: Business systems and processes that  
build on / utilise the new infrastructure to enable the delivery of 
digital initiatives and promote agility.

Customer touchpoints: Value adding multi-channel digital 
touchpoints which drive sales, loyalty and profitability to maintain 
Marshalls’ competitive advantage.

Follow the customer journey

HOMEOWNERS

PUBLIC SECTOR AND 
COMMERCIAL

Customer touchpoints

Customer touchpoints

Customer touchpoints

Customer touchpoints

Systems and 
processes

Systems and 
processes

Infrastructure

We are committed to a long-term digital transformation initiative 
that will fortify our market leading position by creating an engaging 
customer experience through the exploitation of new technologies 
and processes.

Vision
Our vision is to become “Digital by Default” whereby our business 
is focused on the customer using digital technology to deliver 
a frictionless customer journey, which will drive increased sales, 
loyalty and ultimately profitability.

As a business we will continuously watch and  
exploit future technological advancements to enhance the 
customer experience and drive competitive advantage.

Guiding principles
To achieve this vision, Marshalls will be guided by 6 core principles 
which will be applied to the areas of technology, internal process 
and people. By embedding these principles throughout Marshalls, 
we will nurture a culture whereby every business decision is 
assessed in relation to the digital agenda.

Customer value

People 

Process 

Technology 

DIGITAL PRINCIPLES

•  Design for customer 

•  Promote agility 

•  Collaboration

•  Data driven

•  Open and transparent

•  Robust governance

Key deliverables
Marshalls’ focus in 2017 will be on the following areas:

•  Making use of cloud technologies and infrastructure;

• 

Implementing a data strategy that will allow Marshalls to serve customers with the right content, at the right time, in the format they 
require via a omni-channel approach; and

•  Exploiting the growth in mobile usage to support a frictionless customer experience.

17

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plc 
 
 
Key Performance Indicators

Measuring our performance

The Group’s KPIs monitor progress towards the achievement of its objectives. 
All of the Group’s strategic KPIs have improved significantly during 2016.

Revenue 
£’m

Operating profit 
£’m

EPS 
p

£396.9m +3%

£47.6m +27%

18.95p +32%

Return on capital employed 
%

23.0% +21%

16

15

14

13

12

396.9

386.2

358.5

16

15

14

25.3

47.6

37.5

307.4

300.9

13

16.1

12 12.9

18.95

14.32

16

15

14

13

10.13

6.94

16

15

14

13

12.5

8.1

12 5.52

12 5.7

23.0

19.0

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

Delivering growth is key to the 
2020 Strategy.

The sustainable improvement in 
profitability is a strategic priority.

2016 PERFORMANCE
Group revenue has increased 
by 3 per cent in 2016. 
Growth in Domestic revenue 
particularly strong at 
10 per cent.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
The aim continues to be to 
outperform the market and 
maintain or grow market share.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
Sustainable revenue growth 
is the driver of EPS and 
operating cash flow 
(“OCF”) growth.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group closely monitors 
trends and lead indicators and 
continues to benefit from the 
diversity of its business and 
end markets.

2016 PERFORMANCE
Operating profit has increased 
by 27 per cent to £47.6 million 
in 2016. The Group’s strong 
operational gearing has driven 
an increase in reported operating 
margin from 9.7 per cent to 
12.0 per cent, which represents 
an increase of 23 per cent.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
Sustainable improvement 
in profitability.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
EPS and OCF are 
both remuneration 
performance targets.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group focuses on 
innovation and new product 
development in order to 
improve product mix and 
increase value-added sales.

The delivery of long-term 
sustainable profitability for 
shareholders is a strategic priority.

ROCE remains an important 
indicator of sustainable 
shareholder value.

2016 PERFORMANCE
Group EPS has increased 
by 32 per cent in 2016 to 
18.95 pence.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
Significant EPS growth 
is a strategic target.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
EPS growth is a remuneration 
performance target.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group focuses on sales 
opportunities and strategic 
growth opportunities.

2016 PERFORMANCE
Group ROCE is 23.0 per cent for 
the year ended 31 December 
2016, which represents an 
increase of 21 per cent during 
the year. ROCE is defined 
as EBITA / shareholders’ funds 
plus cash / net debt.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
The strategic target is to 
continue to grow ROCE.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
ROCE provides the control and 
balance between the profit and 
cash flow performance targets.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group continues to 
focus on strategic investment 
for both organic and 
acquisitive growth.

Strategic objectives:  

 Shareholder value   

 Relationship building   

 Brand development   

 Sustainable profitability   

 Organic expansion   

 Effective capital structure and control framework

18

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Net cash 
£’m

£5.4m

Dividend per share 
(recommended) p

8.70p +24%

Customer service  
Customer service index

98%

16

5.4

(11.5)

15

(30.5)

14

(35.6)

13

(63.5)

12

16

15

14

13

12

8.70

7.00

6.00

5.25

5.25

16

15

14

13

12

Health and safety 
Percentage reduction 
in working days lost

20%

98

98

97

98

97

16

15

14

13

12

20

15

25

43

30

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

Marshalls continues to support 
a prudent capital structure.

A progressive dividend policy 
remains a key objective.

2016 PERFORMANCE
Significant cash generation 
has seen the Group deliver 
positive cash of £5.4 million 
at 31 December 2016.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
The Group’s strategic target 
is for the ratio of net debt to 
EBITDA to be between 1 and 
2 times over the business cycle.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
OCF is a remuneration 
performance target.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group maintains a 
conservative financial profile 
that recognises cyclical risk 
and a flexible capital structure 
that can respond to 
market changes.

2016 PERFORMANCE
The ordinary dividend per 
share increased by 24 per cent 
to 8.70 pence. On an IFRS basis, 
the dividends declared in the 
year ended 31 December 2016 
are 9.65 pence, an increase of 
54 per cent.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
The continuing strategy of 
maintaining up to 2 times 
cover over the business cycle.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
Remuneration targets are 
aligned with shareholder value.

RISK MANAGEMENT
Risk management remains a 
key factor in the delivery of the 
Group’s strategic objectives and 
risk appetite is aligned with the 
delivery of long-term 
sustainable value.

Customer service lies at the 
heart of the Marshalls brand. The 
Group’s customer service index 
combines measures of product 
availability, on-time delivery 
performance and administrative 
and delivery accuracy. 

2016 PERFORMANCE
The combined customer service 
measure continued to be in 
excess of 98 per cent 
throughout 2016.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
The Group’s customer service 
index target is 95 per cent.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
Customer service 
is a remuneration 
performance target.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group focuses on quality, 
service, reliability and ethical 
standards that differentiate 
Marshalls from its competitors.

Marshalls remains committed 
to meeting the highest health 
and safety standards for all its 
employees and continually strives 
to improve the quality and safety 
of the working environment. 

2016 PERFORMANCE
In 2016 there was a 20 per cent 
reduction in days lost from 
workplace incidents.

STRATEGIC TARGETS
The headline target for 2016 was 
to achieve an accident rate for the 
year no higher than the 2015 
actual results.

REMUNERATION LINKAGE
Health and safety performance 
is a remuneration performance 
target.

RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group’s compliance 
procedures and policies seek to 
ensure that local, national and 
international health and safety 
controls are fully complied with.

19

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcRisk Management and Principal Risks

Managing risk to deliver 
strategic objectives

Managing risk is key to the delivery of long-term sustainable improvement 
in shareholder value. All risks are aligned with the Group’s strategic objectives.

Achievements in 2016
In addition to the delivery of ongoing process and system 
enhancements that are designed to mitigate risk, the Group’s 
risk function has placed particular emphasis on the following areas 
during the year:

•  Capital structure. A detailed review of the Group’s capital structure 
has been undertaken to ensure it remains aligned with corporate 
growth objectives and the external market risk environment. 

•  Cyber risk. In light of increased cyber risk within the wider market, 
this has continued to be a major focus area for risk assessment. 
Following the completion of a series of internal audit projects 
undertaken by KPMG, further improvements have been made 
to mitigate risk, and improve IT security, business continuity 
and disaster recovery.

•  Access to Funding. This was included within the Group’s principal 
risks in 2015, but this year access to external funding has not been 
referred to separately due to a reduction in perceived risk. This is due 
to our existing committed bank facilities and continuing operational 
cash generation, which has seen the Group become cash positive 
at 31 December 2016.

Priorities for 2017
The priorities for the Group’s risk function in 2017 are:

•  Cyber risk. The rapid pace of change in the wider environment 
necessitates cyber risk remaining a key priority for 2017. Further 
internal audit assignments are planned to ensure that the Group 
remains proactive in this area.

•  Supply chain management. Proactive supply chain management 

continues to be a focus area for the Group against a background of 
wider economic uncertainty and an increased risk of cost inflation.

•  Health and safety. This remains an area of focus as the Group 

continually strives to reduce health and safety risk and improve 
performance. Additional staff training will be undertaken in 2017. 
Significant increases in the financial penalty regime have increased 
the potential impact of health and safety incidents.

Approach to risk management
Risk management is the responsibility of the Board and is a key 
factor in the delivery of the Group’s strategic objectives. The Board 
establishes the culture of effective risk management and is 
responsible for maintaining appropriate systems and controls.  
The Board sets the risk appetite and determines the policies and 
procedures that are put in place to mitigate exposure to risks.

Process
There is a formal ongoing process to identify, assess and analyse 
risks and those of a potentially significant nature are included in 
the Group Risk Register. The conclusion of the Group’s internal 
auditor, KPMG, is that the process continues to be a robust 
mechanism for monitoring and controlling the Group’s  
principal risks. 

The Group Risk Register is reviewed and updated at least every 6 
months and the overall process is the subject of regular review. Risks 
are recorded with a full analysis and risk owners are nominated who 
have authority and responsibility for assessing and managing the 
risk. All risks are aligned with the Group’s strategic objectives and 
each risk is analysed for impact and probability to determine 
exposure and impact to the business and the determination of a 
“gross risk score” enables risk exposure to be prioritised. External risks 
include the weather, political and economic conditions, the effect 
of legislation or other regulatory actions, the actions of competitors, 
foreign exchange, raw material prices and pension funding. Internal 
risks include investment in new products, new business strategies 
and acquisitions.

The Group seeks to mitigate exposure to all forms of strategic, 
financial and operational risk, both external and internal. The 
effectiveness of key mitigating controls is continually monitored 
and such controls are subjected to internal audit and periodic 
testing in order to provide independent verification where this is 
deemed appropriate. The effectiveness and impact of key controls 
are evaluated and this is used to determine a “net risk score” for 
each risk. The process is used to develop action plans that are used 
to manage, or respond to, the risks and these are monitored and 
reviewed on a regular basis by the Group’s Audit Committee.

20

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Framework

The Board
•  determines the Group’s approach to risk, its policies and the 
procedures that are put in place to mitigate exposure to risk.

The Audit Committee
•  has delegated responsibility from the Board to oversee risk 

management and internal controls;

• 

reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management and internal 
control procedures; and

•  monitors the effectiveness of the internal audit function and the 

independence of the external audit.

Executive Directors
•  are responsible for the 

effective maintenance of 
the Group’s Risk Register;

•  oversee the management 

of risk;

Internal audit
• 

independently review the 
effectiveness of internal 
control procedures;

• 

report on effectiveness of 
management actions; and

•  monitor risk mitigation and 

•  provide assurance to the 

controls; and

Audit Committee.

•  monitor the effective 

implementation of action plans.

Operational managers
•  are responsible for the identification of operational and strategic risks;

•  are responsible for the ownership and control of specific risks; and

•  are responsible for establishing and managing the implementation 

of appropriate action plans.

Risk heatmap

H
G
H

I

T
C
A
P
M

I

I

M
U
D
E
M

W
O
L

2

4

9

8

6

1

7

3

5

LOW

MEDIUM

HIGH

5 

6 

1 

 Macro-economic 
and political

2  Weather

3  Cyber security risks

4  Customers

LIKELIHOOD

 Competitor activity

7 

 Threat from new 
technologies  
and new business 
models

 Cost and availability 
of raw materials

8  Environmental

9 

 Corporate, legal  
and regulatory

Risk appetite
The Group is prepared to accept a certain level of risk to remain 
competitive but continues to adopt a conservative approach to 
risk management. The risk framework is robust and provides clarity 
in determining the risks faced and the level of risk that we are 
prepared to accept. Marshalls continues to put in place detailed 
plans to manage all risks through strategies that are designed to 
either treat, transfer or terminate the source of the identified risk.

Viability Statement
After considering the principal risks overleaf, the Directors have 
assessed the prospects of the Group over a longer period than 
the period of at least 12 months required by the “going concern” 
basis of accounting. The Directors consider that the Group’s risk 
management process satisfies the requirements of provision 
C.2.2 of the UK Corporate Governance Code.

The Board considers annually, and on a rolling basis, a 3-year 
strategic plan, which is assessed with reference to the Group’s 
current position and prospects, the strategic objectives and the 
operation of the procedures and policies to manage the principal 
risks that might threaten the business model, future performance 
and target capital structure. In this assessment security, flexibility 
and efficiency are the guiding principles that underpin the Group’s 
capital structure objectives. 

The Board considers 3 years to be an appropriate period of 
assessment as this aligns with the Group’s strategic plan and the 
Directors also consider that they have reasonable visibility of the 
market over this period. A 3-year period is consequently considered 
appropriate for the Viability Statement. The Group’s strategic plan 
includes an integrated model that incorporates income statement, 
balance sheet and cash flow projections. Key KPIs and financial ratios 
are reviewed along with the ongoing appropriateness of all 
assumptions used. Scenario planning is undertaken along with 
stress testing against downside sensitivities. The stress testing 
reflects the principal risks that could conceivably threaten the 
Group’s ability to continue operating as a going concern and has 
critically assessed downside scenarios that might give rise to sales 
volume reductions, deteriorating operating margins and increases in 
interest rates. None of the individual sensitivities applied impact the 
Directors’ assessment of viability. The stress testing applied in 2016 
reflects the more cautious economic outlook and the Group’s 
detailed approach to capital structure and forecasting. A more 
significant stress test sensitivity has been applied to reflect a 
dramatic economic downturn and the Group’s updated Risk 
Register, which identified external market factors as being the key 
risk. The stress testing has aimed to replicate the financial impact of 
the last recession as the core sensitivity, with significantly reduced 
sales volumes giving rise to a 33 per cent decrease in revenue over 
the next 3 years.

Based on this assessment, the Directors confirm that they have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for the next 3 years.

Principal risks and uncertainties
The Directors have undertaken a robust, systematic assessment 
of the Group’s principal risks. These have been considered within 
the timeframe of 3 years, which aligns with our Viability 
Statement above.

21

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcRisk Management and Principal Risks – continued 

1

Macro-economic 
and political 

2

Weather 

3

Cyber security risks 

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

NATURE OF RISK
The Group is dependent on the level of 
activity in its end markets. Accordingly, it 
is susceptible to economic downturn and 
the impact of Government policy.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
Increased macro-economic uncertainty 
could lead to lower activity levels which 
could reduce sales and production 
volumes and therefore have an adverse 
effect on the Group’s financial results. 
The impact of exchange rate fluctuations 
could also have an adverse impact on 
material costs.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group closely monitors trends 

and lead indicators, invests in market 
research and is an active member 
of the CPA. 

•  The Group benefits from the diversity 

of its business and end markets. 

•  The Group focuses on sales 

opportunities and strategic growth 
initiatives, together with quality, 
service and its supply chain.

•  The Group focuses on its supplier 

relationships, flexible contracts and 
the use of hedging instruments.

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

Given the perception of increased global 
economic uncertainty, this risk has 
increased and this is reflected in wider 
economic forecasts.

There continues to be growth potential 
in certain focus areas, e.g. Rail, Water 
Management and Street Furniture, and 
forward indicators in the core business 
remain positive.

The economic outlook for the Eurozone 
remains difficult, although proactive 
development of the product range 
continues to be positive.

NATURE OF RISK
The Group is exposed to the impact of 
prolonged periods of bad weather.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
Adverse working conditions could give 
rise to disruption and delays that might 
reduce short-term activity levels. This 
could reduce sales and production 
volumes and therefore have an adverse 
effect on the Group’s financial results.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group has a continuing focus on 
new product development, including 
landscape water management.

•  The Group is developing its internal 

flooring offer and International strategy 
in order to diversify its activities.

•  The development of the Group’s 
Water Management business is 
a significant opportunity.

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

Weather conditions are beyond 
the Group’s control. 

NATURE OF RISK
Inadequate controls and procedures over 
the protection of intellectual property, 
sensitive employee information and 
market influencing data.

The failure to improve controls against 
cyber security risk quickly enough, 
given the rapid pace of change and the 
continuing introduction of new threats.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
Risk of data loss causing financial 
and reputational risk.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  Use of IT security policies.

•  The undertaking of regular cyber 

security risk audits by specialists and 
the quick introduction of mitigation 
controls and other recommended 
procedure updates.

•  Sensitive data is currently restricted 
to selected senior and experienced 
employees who are used to handling 
such data. 

•  Where sensitive data is made available 

to third parties it is done under 
confidentiality agreements with 
reputable suppliers.

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

This remains a high profile area and 
considerable focus is being given 
to promoting awareness of IT 
security policies. 

Appropriate tools and training procedures 
are in place to protect sensitive data 
when stored and transmitted between 
parties (e.g. encryption of hard drives, 
restricted USB devices, secure data 
transmission mechanisms and third party 
security audits).

Strategic objectives:  

 Shareholder value   

 Relationship building   

 Brand development   

 Sustainable profitability   

 Organic expansion   

 Effective capital structure and control framework

22

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
 
4

Customers 

5

Competitor activity 

6

Threat from new technologies 
and new business models 

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

NATURE OF RISK
Reduction in demand for traditional 
products. Risk of new competitors and 
new substitute products appearing. 
Failure to react to market developments.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
The increased competition could 
reduce volumes and margins on 
traditional products.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  Good market intelligence.

•  Flexible business strategy able 
to embrace new technologies.

•  Significant focus on research and 
development and new products.

•  Development of a digital strategy.

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

The ongoing diversification of the business, 
the continued development of the Marshalls 
brand and the focus on new products and 
greater manufacturing efficiency continue 
to mitigate the risk.

NATURE OF RISK
The UK business has a number of key 
customers, in particular the national 
merchants. This is partly as a result of 
the consolidated nature of this market.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
The loss of a significant customer may 
give rise to a significant adverse effect 
on the Group’s financial results.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group focuses on brand and new 
product development, quality and 
customer service improvement.

•  The Group maintains a national network 
of manufacturing and distribution sites. 

•  The Group undertakes ongoing reviews 
of trading policies and relationships and 
maintains constant communication 
with customers.

NATURE OF RISK
The Group has a number of existing 
competitors who compete on range, 
price, quality and service. 

Potential new low cost competitors may 
be attracted into the market through 
increased demand for imported natural 
stone products.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
The increased competition could reduce 
volumes and margins on manufactured 
and traded products.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group has unique selling points that 
differentiate the Marshalls branded offer. 

•  The Group focuses on quality, service, 
reliability and ethical standards that 
differentiate Marshalls from 
competitor products. 

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

•  The Group continues to have the 

Although the underlying risk continues, 
the effective management of key 
relationships and the ongoing 
diversification of the business are 
serving to mitigate the risk.

lowest cost to market. 

•  The Group has a continuing focus 
on new product development. 

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

The more uncertain market environment 
has not led to any significant changes in 
competitive pressure.

Although there is continuing demand for 
imported natural stone products, the fall 
in the value of Sterling during 2016 has 
arguably reduced the competitive risk.

23

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plc 
 
 
Risk Management and Principal Risks – continued 

7

Cost and availability  
of raw materials 

8

Environmental 

9

Corporate,  
legal and regulatory 

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

LINK TO STRATEGY

NATURE OF RISK
The Group is susceptible to significant 
increases in the price of raw materials, 
utilities, fuel oil and haulage costs and 
decreases in vehicle availability.

As demand increases, the Group is 
potentially more exposed to the risk of 
temporary raw material shortages. 

POTENTIAL IMPACT
The increased costs could reduce 
margins and may be further impacted in 
the event of imbalances in the mix of 
regional activity.

The risk of market demand exceeding raw 
material supply could lead to inefficient 
production, which could reduce margins. 

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group benefits from the diversity 

NATURE OF RISK
The impact of the “Environmental 
Protocol” leads to the need for 
increasingly expensive processes.

An environmental contamination 
event may lead to a prosecution and 
to reputational loss.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
An incident could lead to disruption to 
production and to financial penalties as 
well as a potential negative impact on 
the Group’s reputation.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group uses professional specialists 

covering carbon reduction, water 
management and biodiversity. 

•  The Group focuses on the 

implementation of ISO standards.

of its business and end markets. 

•  The Group has a formal Group 

sustainability strategy focusing on 
impact reduction.

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

The Group is unable to predict future 
changes in environmental laws or policies 
or the ultimate cost of compliance with 
such laws or policies.

•  The Group focuses on its supplier 

relationships, flexible contracts and the 
use of hedging instruments. 

•  The Group utilises sales pricing and 
purchasing policies designed to 
mitigate the risks. 

•  The Group uses specialist 

delivery vehicles.

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

Cost inflation remains a risk as demand 
for raw materials increases against a 
backdrop of increased economic 
uncertainty. All importers are faced 
with the same issues.

The risk of temporary shortages is 
mitigated by proactive supply chain 
management and the use of 
alternative suppliers.

NATURE OF RISK
The Group may be adversely affected 
by an unexpected reputational event, 
e.g. an issue in its ethical supply chain 
or due to a health and safety incident.

POTENTIAL IMPACT
An incident could lead to a disruption 
to the supply of products for customers 
and to increased costs as well as a 
potential negative impact on the 
Group’s reputation.

Significant increases in the penalty regime 
have increased the potential financial 
impact of health and safety incidents.

MITIGATING FACTORS
•  The Group employs compliance 

procedures, policies and independent 
audit processes which seek to ensure 
that local, national and international 
regulatory and compliance procedures 
are fully complied with. 

CHANGE IN RISK IN THE YEAR

The Group has undertaken internal 
restructuring to provide greater focus 
for specialist teams and continues to 
improve compliance procedures within 
the supply chain. 

Health and safety and the potential 
impact of the Bribery Act continue to be 
high profile risk areas. These areas are 
receiving additional management focus, 
but the impact of the underlying risk 
has increased.

Strategic objectives:  

 Shareholder value   

 Relationship building   

 Brand development   

 Sustainable profitability   

 Organic expansion   

 Effective capital structure and control framework

24

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
Sustainability

At the heart of all we do

By being a responsible business we are leveraging sustainability 
to drive competitive advantage for our business.

Human rights

Environment

Labour

Anti-corruption

Find out more online www.marshalls.co.uk/sustainability

Sustainability overview
Corporate responsibility, awareness and mitigation of adverse impacts 
on the environment, and positive engagement with our community 
and employees have long been core values of Marshalls. We aim to align 
our business values, purpose and strategy with the social, economic and 
environmental needs of our stakeholders, embedding responsible and 
ethical business policies and practices in everything we do.

Our commitment to these values is led by the Board and Jack Clarke 
is the Director with primary responsibility for reporting to the Board 
on environmental, social and sustainability matters.

Marshalls won the award for Corporate Social Responsibility at the 
prestigious PLC Awards in March 2017.

Marshalls’ sustainable business model 
Empowered by our brand values of leadership, excellence, trust 
and sustainability we work passionately and diligently to uphold 
the United Nations Global Compact pillars of human rights, labour, 
environment and anti-corruption. 

The Group has a sustainable business plan and has set KPIs 
for the key areas of this plan. It addresses economic, social and 
environmental aspects of Marshalls’ operations, underpinned 
by the development of management systems recognised by 
an independent third party (“BSI”). Sustainability and corporate 
responsibility are key elements of the Marshalls culture.

Human rights
Marshalls supports human rights consistent with the Universal 
Declaration of Human Rights. In conducting business across the globe 
we respect these rights and seek to uphold, preserve and promote them. 
Our corporate responsibility to respect human rights means acting 
with due diligence to avoid infringing upon the rights of others, and 
addressing any issues that do occur. We recognise that our responsibility 
applies across all business activities, including business relationships with 
third parties and those within our supply chain. 

25

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcSustainability – continued 

Environment
Our environmental objectives and targets are driven by a strong 
commitment to compliance coupled with mitigation plans to 
address legislative and physical business risks, whilst maximising 
opportunities against a corporate strategic commitment to be 
a sustainable business. At the heart of Marshalls’ sustainable business 
model is an approach which combines key business issues and key 
performance indicators with third party verification, legislation and 
industry standards including ISO14001 for environmental management 
and ISO50001 for energy management. We have clear environmental, 
energy and climate change policies in place and are on track to meet 
our policy commitments. Key environmental issues for us are climate 
change, water and biodiversity. Marshalls’ successful management of 
environmental issues has been recognised by third parties such 
as Business in the Community. In addition to our mandatory duty 
to report annually on our greenhouse gas emissions, Marshalls 
continues to report voluntarily to the Carbon Disclosure Project. 
We report in detail on our initiatives in the Sustainability Report 
published on our website. 

Labour
From living wages in the UK to the elimination of child labour in 
India, we are committed to ensuring that what is good for business 
is good for society. Our approach to labour rights is driven by the 
Ethical Trading Initiative (“ETI”) Base Code which we adopted in 2005. 
To ensure that the Base Code is embedded within operations and 
supply chains we have social auditors in India, China and Vietnam. 
Their role is to check each and every day that the Base Code is being 
upheld and to report any concerns or violations so that we can take swift 
action should we need to. Marshalls has worked closely with external 
organisations to evaluate our business and supply chain against the 
principles now embodied in the Modern Slavery Act 2015 and 
eliminate slavery in all its forms.

In 2016, the Board approved Marshalls’ Modern Slavery Statement 
which applies across our business and supply chain relationships and 
sets out Marshalls’ commitment to the abolition of slavery in all its forms.

Modern Slavery Statement www.marshalls.co.uk/msa

Anti-corruption
Marshalls is committed to conducting business with the utmost 
integrity and in accordance with the principles set out in the Bribery 
Act 2010. Greater transparency leads to increased trust. This in 
turn provides the solid foundations required for sustainable growth. 
By making our financial, social, environmental and ethical data 
transparent we can inspire trust which will lead to customers buying 
more of our products, investors purchasing more of our stock, and 
engaged employees working harder and smarter.

The Marshalls’ Anti-Bribery Code embodied within our organisation, 
since its adoption in 2011, was extended through the supply chain. 
The Group’s compliance and monitoring processes were also the 
subject of an internal control audit by KPMG. 

Equality and diversity
The Group has policies that promote equality and diversity in the 
workforce as well as prohibiting discrimination in any form. The Group 
is developing a Code of Conduct, initially focusing on its supply chain, 
which clearly states its commitment to these principles and requires 
a similar commitment from its business partners.

26

Employees
Marshalls is proud to be a “Living Wage Employer”, underscoring its 
commitment to its employees. The Group is establishing a new defined 
contribution pension scheme within a Master Trust operated by 
Aviva/Friends Life. This will provide a much improved pension 
proposition for all employees.

We welcome and give full and fair consideration to applications 
from individuals with recognised disabilities to ensure they have 
equal opportunity for employment and development in our business. 
Wherever practicable we offer training and make adjustments to 
ensure disabled employees are not disadvantaged in the workplace.

We also remain committed to employing a diverse workforce and, 
in particular, encouraging more women to enter what has traditionally 
been a highly male-dominated workplace. At the end of 2016 our workforce 
comprised 2,250 employees with the following gender balance:

Total workforce

Senior managers

Directors

Male

88%

86%

83%

Female

12%

14%

17%

Employee engagement and development
Improving employee engagement across the Group continued to 
be an important priority in 2016. Initiatives ranged from charitable 
events, a mobile employee wellbeing kiosk and the introduction of 
mental health awareness training. Charitable activities in 2016 raised 
nearly £80,000 for our chosen charity, Prostate Cancer UK. 

We have increased our focus on “Early Careers” by doubling the 
number of younger apprentices we employ in 2016 and through 
the introduction of a placement and work shadowing programme. 
To support development of the internal talent pool, we implemented 
a new management training programme during 2016, with more 
than 100 employees taking part in a personal insights and behavioural 
profiling initiative to improve their personal effectiveness. Marshalls 
is supporting a number of employees through a 4-year degree 
apprenticeship programme with Manchester Metropolitan University, 
and in 2017 we expect to see an increase in the number of 
apprenticeships offered by the Group (in particular manufacturing 
and engineering) with the introduction of the apprenticeship levy 
in April, driving our “Early Careers” agenda to create a sustainable 
and diverse talent pipeline for the future.

We are making a significant investment in our HR information systems 
in 2017. This will improve operational efficiency and reliability of data in 
personnel and payroll administration and improve our ability to ensure 
consistent, fair and transparent treatment of employees. It will also 
facilitate better decision making in our resource planning, performance 
management, recruitment and talent development initiatives. 

We are planning our approach to gender pay gap reporting in 
accordance with the emerging government regulations and definitions. 
The Group remains committed to supporting equal pay and to 
identifying and eradicating any discrimination on gender grounds. 

Carbon emissions – disclosure
Marshalls’ Energy and Climate Change Policy confirms the Group’s 
commitment to reducing the energy and carbon impact of its business. 
Our target is to reduce Group absolute CO2e emissions in line with the 
UK Government’s targets (34 per cent by 2020 and 80 per cent by 
2050 from a 1990 baseline). The progress indicates that reductions 
are in line with the 2020 and 2050 targets.

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
The Group complied with its legal obligation under the Government’s 
Carbon Reduction Commitment (“CRC”) Energy Efficiency Scheme by 
submitting its Annual Report and surrendering appropriate carbon 
allowances for the period April 2015 to March 2016 within the time 
limit imposed by the legislation. The Group continues to be certified 
to the Carbon Trust Standard. The Group’s approach to the Energy 
Savings Opportunity Scheme (“ESOS”) legislation was to define its 
energy management in compliance with the international standard 
for energy management ISO50001, gaining certification in November 
2015 and maintaining this through 2016. The Group continues to 
voluntarily disclose data to the “Carbon Disclosure Project” receiving 
a B rating for its 2016 submission. This disclosure includes the wider 
carbon management performance over time and also provides an 
insight for shareholders regarding the Group’s energy, carbon and 
climate change impact management programme.

Marshalls has a mandatory duty to report its annual greenhouse gas 
emissions (“GHG”) under the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic and 
Directors’ Reports) Regulations 2013 and the Large and Medium-sized 
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008. 
Marshalls uses The Greenhouse Gas Protocol: A Corporate Accounting 
and Reporting Standard (revised edition) and the October 2016 “Defra” 
published CO2e conversion factors to measure its GHG emissions.

The Group has conducted audits of its UK fugitive emissions and found 
these to be 0.57 per cent of the Group total emissions; accordingly 
these are excluded from the report.

The chart below (left) illustrates the Group’s UK absolute CO2e 
emissions in tonnes, including transport activities, between 2012 
and 2016.

The chart below (right) illustrates the Group’s CO2e intensity emissions 
as a proportion of production output, including transport activities 
between 2012 and 2016.

A number of factors have contributed to the Group’s energy 
performance during the year including significant decreases in 
carbonisation of the electricity grid supply, product mix, weather 
(temperature impacting on the use of heating / cooling fuel) and 
energy management activities. Diesel use is responsible for the majority 
of the scope 1 emissions and during the year Marshalls increased 
its LGV fleet by 17 per cent full-time equivalent vehicles to satisfy 
customer requirements. This has resulted in the reporting of previous 
scope 3 emissions into scope 1. 

The Group reports that it is responsible for the GHG emissions 
of Marshalls NV. The CO2 emission (using Belgium Government 
Emissions data) from Marshalls NV activities in 2016 was (absolute) 
654 tonnes and (intensity) 12.42 kg per tonne production.

Marshalls aims to publish its environmental KPI performance for the 
financial year in a separate document, the Marshalls’ Environmental KPI 
2017 Report. This will cover the energy performance in more detail, 
together with reporting of the environmental governance, policies, 
management and key environmental impact areas such as waste, water 
and packaging. The Environmental KPI 2017 Report will also detail our 
work with internationally recognised expert bodies such as the Carbon 
Trust and the RSPB.

This section of the Annual Report has been audited by a qualified 
verifier on behalf of BSI. On the basis of the work undertaken this 
carbon statement is considered to be a fair reflection of the Group’s 
performance during 2016 and contains no misleading information.

Scope 1 and 2 emissions

Relative CO2e emissions for Scope 1 and 2 from  
UK operations per tonne of production 

e
2
O
C
s
e
n
n
o
T

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

0

 Scope 1    

 Scope 2

16,212

43,518

14,015

16,769

16,436

14,251

40,012

36,166

38,746

40,873

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

t
u
p
t
u
o
n
o
i
t
c
u
d
o
r
p
e
n
n
o
t

r
e
p
e
2
O
C
s
g
k

14.00

12.00

10.00

8.00

6.00

4.00

2.00

0.00

11.73

12.12

11.52

10.94

10.56

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

Climate Change Policy  
www.marshalls.co.uk/ccp

Carbon Disclosure Project  
www.cdp.net

Environmental  
www.marshalls.co.uk/EnvKPI2016

27

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plc 
 
 
 
 
 
Accident frequency and 
severity rates (per 1 million 
hours worked)

All accidents

All lost time 
accidents

All RIDDORs

2012

69.5

14.0

6.1

2013

65.6

12.2

3.6

2014

59.1

7.2

3.3

2015

2016

48.8

49.2

5.1

1.6

5.6

2.3

All days lost

134.5

114.6

80.7

45.8

38.0

Average UK 
headcount

2,252

2,055

2,132

2,237

2,253

During 2016, the Group has continued to invest in health and safety 
awareness training through its “Visible Felt Leadership” initiative, 
which is delivered to all managers and supervisory staff.

Sustainability – continued 

Health and safety
Marshalls remains committed to meeting the highest safety standards 
for all its employees, reinforcing and developing its safety processes and 
developing a competent workforce with a view to achieving long-term 
improvement gains, and this remains a key priority for the business. 

Achievement of annual health and safety improvement targets is 
directly linked to the remuneration of the Executive Directors and 
senior management, as explained in the Remuneration Report on 
pages 46 to 65. 

Our Safety, Health and Incident Prevention (“SHIP”) teams, consisting 
of employee representatives and managers, are the cornerstone of 
the safety management system at site level and meet regularly to 
support and develop our safety programme and objectives. The 
Group’s operating sites have been progressively implementing 
Integrated Management Registration systems accredited by the 
British Standards Institution incorporating accreditation to the 
Occupational Health and Safety Accreditation Standard (“OHSAS”) 
18001:2007. At the end of 2016 all UK operational sites within the 
Group held a BS OHSAS (18001:2007) registration. 

The headline target for 2016 was to maintain days lost resulting from 
workplace incidents at a figure no higher than the 2015 actual result. 
The actual results achieved were:

•  20 per cent reduction in days lost resulting from workplace incidents;

•  2 per cent reduction in all-incident frequency rate;

•  4 per cent increase in lost time incidents (“LTIs”) frequency rate; and

•  43 per cent increase in incidents reportable to the HSE under the 

Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrence Regulations 
(“RIDDOR”).

The primary target for 2017 will again be to achieve an accident rate 
for the year no higher than the “baseline” 2015 result. The table 
opposite shows the KPIs used by the Group to monitor performance 
and progress against those KPIs over the last 5 years.

28

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Financial Review

Strong balance sheet with  
growth in all key financial metrics

Significant cash generation has given 
rise to a net positive cash position at 
the year end.

Summary
 • Operating profit up 27% to £47.6 million.

 • EBITDA up 17% to £60.8 million.

 • Return on capital employed up 21%  

(400 basis points) to 23.0%.

 • Strong operating cash flow at 94% of EBITDA.

 • Significant headroom for investment.

 • Increase in final ordinary dividend of 22%, 
plus additional supplementary dividend 
of 3.00 pence per share.

Trading summary
Revenue
Revenue for the year ended 31 December 2016 was £396.9 million 
(2015: £386.2 million), which represented an increase of 2.8 per cent. 
Revenue growth was particularly strong in the Domestic end market, 
which has seen growth of 10.2 per cent in the last year.

Revenue variance analysis 2015/2016

400

386.2

11.0

0.3

396.9

-0.6

m
£

’

350

300

250

2015 
revenue 

Landscape 
Products 

Smaller UK 
 Businesses 

International

2016 
revenue

Analysis of revenue by end market is summarised in the table below:

Analysis of revenue by end market

UK Domestic

Public Sector and Commercial

International

2016
£’m

120.8

256.8

19.3

109.6

257.6

19.0

2015
£’m

Change
%

10.2

(0.3)

1.7

2.8

UK Domestic

Public Sector and Commercial

International

396.9

386.2

%

30.5

64.6

4.9

%

28.4

66.6

5.0

The strategy is to maintain a strong 
balance sheet, a flexible capital structure 
and a clear capital allocation policy that 
drives growth and rewards shareholders.

29

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plc 
 
Financial Review – continued 

Revenue analysis

64+

64% 

 UK Domestic 

  Public Sector  
and Commercial

G 78+

 International 

31%

5%

  Landscape 
Products

  Smaller UK 
businesses

78% 

17% 

 International 

5%

Trading summary continued
Public Sector and Commercial
In the Public Sector and Commercial end market, revenue was broadly 
flat compared with 2015. Sales in the Public Sector and Commercial 
end market now represent approximately 64 per cent of Group sales.

Marshalls’ strategy continues to be to enhance its position as a market 
leading landscape products specialist. The Group’s technical and sales 
teams remain particularly focused on those market areas where future 
demand is considered to be greatest and Water Management, Rail and 
New Build Housing continue to show strong order intake. We promote 
our full range of new products and sustainable integrated solutions to 
customers, architects and contractors and the Group is outperforming 
the market in these areas. The Group’s “Design Space” office in Central 
London was opened specifically to showcase the Group’s brand leading 
capabilities and provide customers with ready access to samples and 
technical advice.

Skilled engineers and technicians are integral to the Group’s world-class 
Manufacturing, Innovation and New Product Development team. 
This capability delivers strong competitive advantage by combining 
machinery design and implementation with process improvement 
and continues to enable the Group to accelerate new product 
development across the business. As regards the Group’s mineral 
reserves, the “Marshalls Stone Standard” quality mark gives our 
customers full assurance that all Marshalls natural stone not only 
meets, but exceeds, the base technical levels outlined in BS7533. 

Domestic
In the Domestic end market, revenue increased by 10.2 per cent. 
Sales to the UK Domestic end market now represent approximately 
31 per cent of Group sales.

Installer order books at the end of February 2017 were 10.9 weeks 
(February 2016: 10.5 weeks), compared with 11.0 weeks at the end of 
October 2016. The Group continues to receive good feedback from its 
customers and installers for the consistency and quality of service and 
we remain committed to producing new products that are better 
than any existing market offering. 

The Group’s operational strategy continues to be to drive more sales 
through quality installers. The Marshalls Register of approved domestic 
installers is unique and has now grown to almost 2,000 teams. The 
objective is to continually develop the Marshalls brand and improve 
the product mix, whilst ensuring a consistently high standard of 
quality, excellent customer service and marketing support across 
our national network. 

The Group’s industry leading standards remained high in 2016 giving a 
combined customer service measure of 98 per cent (2015: 98 per cent). 
Marshalls continues to receive good feedback from its customers and 
installers for the consistency and quality of its products and service. 

International
Sales to International markets increased by 1.7 per cent. Trading 
conditions continue to be difficult in Western Europe and this 
represents a solid performance. The Group continues to develop 
its global supply chains and infrastructure. The continuing focus is 
to ensure that our international operations are aligned with market 
opportunities. The new sales office in Dubai was opened in early 
2016 and is already making a positive contribution.

Operating profit

Trading results

EBITDA

Depreciation / amortisation

Operating profit

2016
£’m

60.8

(13.2)

2015
£’m

Change
%

17.3

51.8

(14.3)

47.6

37.5

27.1

Operating profit was £47.6 million (2015: £37.5 million), 
which represents an increase of 27.1 per cent. EBITDA increased 
by 17.3 per cent to £60.8 million (2015: £51.8 million) and EPS was 
18.95 pence (2015: 14.32 pence), an increase of 32.3 per cent. 

ROCE increased by 21.1 per cent to 23.0 per cent (2015: 19.0 per cent) 
driven by tight control and management of working capital. This 
represents a compound annual growth rate of 41.9 per cent over 
3 years. Capital employed has increased by only 3.7 per cent to 
£211.7 million (2015: £204.2 million) notwithstanding the more 
significant increase in profit.

30

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201631
+
5
+
17
+
5
+
G
Return on capital employed (%)

25

20

15

10

5

0

23.0

19.0

12.5

8.1

2013

2014

2015

2016

First half / second half phasing
The following table summarises the relative performance of the second 
half of 2016 compared with that for the 6 months ended 30 June 2016. 
The table illustrates the continued improvement in the second half of 
2016 with revenue increasing by 4 per cent and operating profit 
increasing by 40 per cent compared with the comparable 6-month period 
in 2015. This illustrates the impact of operational and manufacturing 
efficiency improvements and strong operational gearing.

First half / 
second half phasing

2016
£’m

2015
£’m

Change
%

2016
%

2015
%

Revenue

HY1

HY2

Total

Operating profit

HY1

HY2

Total

202.4

194.5

199.1

187.1

396.9

386.2

26.0

21.6

47.6

22.0

15.5

37.5

1.7

4.0

2.8

18.1

39.9

27.1

51

49

55

45

52

48

59

41

Profit margins
The Group has continued to strengthen its market position and 
operating margin has increased by 23.7 per cent to 12.0 per cent 
(2015: 9.7 per cent, on a reported basis). 

Margin analysis

2015

Landscape Projects

Smaller UK Businesses

International

2016

Reported
operating
profit
£’m

Margin
 impact
%

Revenue
£’m

386.2

37.5

11.0

(0.6)

0.3

9.0

0.5

0.6

9.7

2.0

0.1

0.2

396.9

47.6

12.0

The table illustrates the impact of operational gearing in the UK businesses 
as a result of volume growth, which has been ahead of CPA forecasts. The 
Group’s Landscape Products business is a reportable segment servicing 
both the UK Public Sector and Commercial and UK Domestic end markets. 
Revenue increased by £11.0 million and operating profit grew by 
£9.0 million in the Landscape Products business.

There has been continued performance improvement in the Smaller 
UK Businesses during 2016 and they have collectively delivered 
further profit growth of 13.3 per cent. The Smaller UK Businesses 
include Street Furniture, Mineral Products and Stone Cladding and 
continue to be a positive driver for growth.

Operational developments
Capital investment in property, plant, equipment and intangible assets 
in 2016 totalled £13.9 million (2015: £14.9 million). This compares with 
depreciation and amortisation of £13.2 million (2015: £14.3 million). 
In accordance with the Group’s 2020 Strategy, we will increasingly 
invest in self help capital projects to deliver new, innovative products 
and drive through sustainable cost reductions and improvements 
in operational efficiency. We have a strong pipeline of such projects 
and capital expenditure of £20 million is targeted for 2017, including 
£6 million of additional, self help investment. 

Research and development expenditure in the year ended 
31 December 2016 amounted to £3.4 million (2015: £3.1 million). 
Investment in research and development covers a number of areas 
including the development of the Group’s project engineering and 
manufacturing capabilities, technical innovations in concrete and 
other materials and extending the new product pipeline. Revenue 
from new products increased by 10 per cent during 2016 in the 
core Landscape Products business.

Net financial expenses 
Net finance costs were £1.6 million (2015: £2.2 million) and interest 
was covered 29.9 times (2015: 17.2 times). External charges totalled 
£1.2 million (2015: £1.8 million) and, including scheme administration 
costs, there was an IAS 19 notional interest charge of £0.4 million 
(2015: £0.4 million) in relation to the Group’s pension scheme. The 
IAS 19 notional interest includes interest on obligations under the 
defined benefit section of the Marshalls plc pension scheme net 
of the expected return on scheme assets. 

Taxation
The effective tax rate was 18.5 per cent (2015: 20.9 per cent) and 
benefited from a credit arising on the finalisation of prior period tax 
computations. The tax charge includes a deferred tax credit of 
£1.1 million arising, in part, due to a further substantively enacted 
reduction in the rate of corporation tax to 17 per cent by April 2021. 
The Group has paid £7.1 million (2015: £7.0 million) of corporation tax 
during the year. Deferred tax of £0.2 million in relation to the actuarial 
gain arising on the defined benefit pension scheme in the year has 
been taken to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Marshalls has again been awarded the Fair Tax Mark, which recognises 
social responsibility and transparency in a company’s tax affairs. 
The Group’s tax policy has long been closely aligned with the 
Fair Tax Mark’s objectives and this is now supported by additional 
tax disclosures and a declared tax policy. 

31

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFinancial Review – continued 

Trading summary continued
Dividends
The recommended “supplementary dividend” of 3.00 pence 
(2015: 2.00 pence) per share is discretionary and non-recurring and 
recognises that the business has sufficient capital both to finance 
increased investment and to maintain a conservative and flexible 
capital structure. When added to the normal full-year dividend of 
8.70 pence, this gives a total dividend for the year of 11.70 pence, 
which represents an increase against the prior year of 30 per cent. 
The incremental cash outflow in 2016 in relation to the supplementary 
dividend has been £3.9 million and will be approximately £5.9 million 
in 2017. 

Dividends (p)

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

 Supplementary

  Final

 Interim

3.50

1.75

2013

4.00

2.00

2014

3.00

5.80

2.90

2.00

4.75

2.25

2015

2016

Capital allocation
The Group’s capital allocation policy is to maintain a strong balance 
sheet with a flexible capital structure that recognises cyclical risk. The 
Group’s capital structure has 3 guiding principles; security, efficiency 
and liquidity.

The capital allocation strategy prioritises organic capital investment, 
supported by an increase in new product development and research 
and development expenditure. The strategy also targets selective 
bolt-on acquisition opportunities. In addition the objective is to 
maintain a dividend cover of 2 times earnings over the medium term 
and to give consideration to supplementary dividends.

Balance sheet

Group balance sheet

Non-current assets

Current assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Net assets

Net cash / (debt)

2016
£’m

193.4

139.7

(87.1)

(28.9)

2015
£’m

192.8

137.0

(87.1)

(50.0)

217.1

192.7

5.4

(11.5)

Net assets at 31 December 2016 were £217.1 million (2015: £192.7 million). 
The Group has a strong balance sheet with a good range of medium-term 
bank facilities available to fund investment initiatives to generate growth. 
At 31 December 2016 the Group had cash of at £5.4 million, compared 
with net debt of £11.5 million at 31 December 2015.

The Group continues to prioritise inventory management and 
improved stock turnover. We believe debtor days remain industry 
leading due to continued close control of credit management 
procedures. The Group maintains credit insurance which provides 
excellent intelligence to minimise the number and value of bad debts 
and, ultimately, provides compensation if bad debts are incurred. 

The Group’s defined benefit pension scheme reported a surplus of 
£4.3 million at 31 December 2016 (2015: £3.4 million). The amount 
has been determined by the scheme actuary using assumptions that are 
considered to be prudent and in line with current market levels. The fair 
value of the scheme assets at 31 December 2016 was £360.1 million 
(2015: £302.2 million) and the present value of the scheme liabilities is 
£355.8 million (2015: £298.8 million). These changes have resulted in an 
actuarial gain, net of deferred taxation, of £1.4 million (2015: £3.9 million 
actuarial loss) and this has been recorded in the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income. The Company has agreed with the Trustee that no 
cash contributions are now payable under the funding and recovery plan. 

Analysis of net cash / (debt)

Analysis of net cash / (debt)

Cash and cash equivalents

Bank loans

Finance leases

2016
£’m

20.7

(14.9)

(0.4)

5.4

2015
£’m

25.0

(36.1)

(0.4)

(11.5)

Priorities for capital

1
Organic 
growth

2
 R&D 
NPD

3
 Ordinary 
dividends

4
 Selective 
acquisitions

5
 Supplementary 
dividends

Capital investment in 
growth projects.  
Target £20 million in 2017

Increase research  
and development 
and new product 
development

Maintain dividend cover 
of 2 times earnings over  
the business cycle

Target selective bolt-on 
acquisition opportunities 
in Water Management, 
Street Furniture 
and Minerals

Supplementary dividends 
when appropriate. 
Discretionary and 
non-recurring

32

STRATEGIC REPORTMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Banking facility headroom

n
o

i
l
l
i

m
£

’

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

-20

Dec-12

Jun-13

Dec-13

Jun-14

Dec-14

Jun-15

Dec-15

Jun-16

Dec-16

Committed

On demand

Seasonal

Net deb

Significant cash generation has given rise to a net positive cash position 
of £5.4 million at 31 December 2016 (2015: £11.5 million net debt). 
This improvement is due to the operating cash flow impact of strong 
trading together with a continuation of the close control of working 
capital. Cash management continues to be a high priority. 

Borrowing facilities
In August 2016 following the continued steady reduction in net debt 
the Group renewed its short-term working capital facilities and reduced 
its seasonal working capital facility to £10.0 million. The Group also 
extended the maturity of each of its committed facilities by 12 months. 
The Group continues its policy of having a range of committed bank 
facilities in place with a positive spread of medium-term maturities 
that now extends to 2021. The Group’s committed facilities are all 
revolving credit facilities with interest charged at a variable rate 
based on LIBOR.

The total bank borrowing facilities at 31 December 2016 amounted 
to £95.0 million (2015: £95.0 million), of which £80.0 million 
(2015: £58.9 million) remained unutilised. In addition, the Group 
has a seasonal working capital facility of £10.0 million which is 
available between 1 February and 31 August each year. The Group 
has significant headroom in its facilities. 

Interest cover and net debt to EBITDA covenants in the facilities were 
comfortably met at the year end. The bank facilities are unsecured 
save for inter-company guarantees between the Group and its 
subsidiary undertakings in favour of the facility banks.

Expiry date

Committed facilities

Q3 2021

Q3 2020

Q3 2019

Q3 2018

On-demand facilities

Available all year

Seasonal (February to August inclusive)

Facility
£’m

Cumulative facility
£’m

20

20

20

20

15

10

20

40

60

80

95

105

Cash generation
The Group is significantly cash generative. In the year ended 
31 December 2016 net cash flow from operating activities was 
£49.4 million (2015: £49.7 million).

Group cash flow

Net cash from operating activities

Net cash from investing activities

Net cash from financing activities

Movement in net debt in the period

Foreign exchange

Net debt at beginning of period

Net cash / (debt) at end of year

Analysis of cash utilisation

Net cash from operating activities

Capital expenditure

Proceeds from sale of property assets

Payments to acquire own shares/other

Cash returned to shareholders

Movement in net debt

2016
£’m

49.4

(10.0)

(20.2)

19.2

(2.3)

(11.5)

5.4

2016
£’m

49.4

(13.9)

3.8

(1.1)

(19.0)

19.2

2015
£’m

49.7

(13.8)

(17.9)

18.0

1.0

(30.5)

(11.5)

2015
£’m

49.7

(14.9)

1.1

(5.6)

(12.3)

18.0

Cash outflow on capital expenditure in the year was £13.9 million 
(2015: £14.9 million). The majority of this expenditure was invested 
in the replacement of existing assets, business improvements and 
new process technology. Proceeds from the sale of targeted property 
assets contributed £3.8 million (2015: £1.1 million). Dividend 
payments in the year were £19.0 million (2015: £12.3 million). 

Jack Clarke
Finance Director

33

STRATEGIC REPORTAnnual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcBoard of Directors and Secretary

Andrew Allner
Chairman

Martyn Coffey
Chief Executive

Jack Clarke
Finance Director

Janet Ashdown
Senior Independent 
Non‑Executive Director

BOARD COMMITTEES
Audit; Remuneration (Chair); 
Nomination.

TERM OF OFFICE
Appointed in March 2015. 
Became Senior Independent 
Non-Executive Director in May 
2016 on Alan Coppin’s retirement.

BOARD COMMITTEES
Remuneration; 
Nomination (Chairman).

TERM OF OFFICE
Joined the Board in July 2003; 
appointed as Chairman in May 2010. 
Last re-elected in May 2016. Also 
chairs the Nomination Committee.

LENGTH OF SERVICE
13 years 6 months 
(5 years 6 months as Chairman)

BOARD COMMITTEES
None.

BOARD COMMITTEES
None.

TERM OF OFFICE
Joined the Company and appointed 
to the Board in September 2013. 
Last re-elected in May 2016.

TERM OF OFFICE
Joined the Company and appointed 
to the Board on 1 October 2014. 
Last re-elected in May 2016.

LENGTH OF SERVICE
3 years 3 months

LENGTH OF SERVICE
2 years 3 months

LENGTH OF SERVICE
1 year 9 months

INDEPENDENT
Yes (on appointment as Chairman)

INDEPENDENT
No

INDEPENDENT
No

INDEPENDENT
Yes

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Significant current listed company 
Board experience, as Chairman 
and as a Non-Executive Director; 
previously Non-Executive Director 
of AZ Electronic Materials SA (until 
2014) and CSR plc (until 2013). 
Previous Executive roles include 
Group Finance Director of RHM plc, 
taking a lead role in its flotation 
in July 2005 on the London Stock 
Exchange, and CEO of Enodis plc. 
Also held senior Executive positions 
with Dalgety plc, Amersham 
International plc and Guinness plc.

Chartered Accountant, former 
partner of Price Waterhouse. 
Graduate of the University of Oxford.

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Wide Executive leadership 
experience: previously Divisional 
Chief Executive Officer of BDR 
Thermea Group BV, a leading 
manufacturer and distributor of 
domestic and industrial heating 
and hot water systems operating 
in 70 countries and with a turnover 
of €1.8 billion, formed in 2009 from 
the merger of Baxi and De Dietrich 
Remeha. Prior to the merger, he 
was Chief Executive of the private 
equity-owned Baxi Group. Also 
held the position of Managing 
Director of Pirelli Cables where he 
spent 14 years in the UK, Australia 
and North America. Holds a BSc 
in Mathematics.

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Chartered Accountant. Joined 
Marshalls from AMEC Foster 
Wheeler plc, where he was 
Executive Vice President and 
Director of Change Management. 
He has extensive experience in 
managing international operations, 
having previously served as CFO 
of AMEC’s £850 million power and 
process division and its US$1.5 billion 
environment and infrastructure 
division. He has extensive M&A 
experience. Previous experience 
includes senior finance and 
operational management roles with 
Halliburton and Mobil Oil. Holds 
an MSc (Civil Engineering) and 
BA (Economics and Management).

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Chairman of The Go-Ahead 
Group plc and Fox Marble 
Holdings plc, and Non-Executive 
Director at Northgate plc.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Officer of the Construction 
Products Association. Director of 
the Mineral Products Association. 
Non-Executive Director 
of Eurocell plc.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
None.

34

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Non-Executive Director of SIG Plc 
and a member of its Audit, 
Remuneration, Nomination and 
Governance Committees. Janet 
was appointed to the Board of 
the Nuclear Decommissioning 
Authority in 2015 and, until the 
end of April 2017, continues to 
be a Non-Executive Director of 
Coventry Building Society and 
a member of its Audit and 
Remuneration Committees.

Janet’s Executive career included 
30 years with BP plc, most recently 
as Director, BP Oil UK Limited, and 
Head of UK Retail and Commercial 
Fuels. Between 2010 and 2012 
she was CEO of Harvest Energy 
and is currently Chair of Trustees 
of the charity “Hope in Tottenham”.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Non-Executive Director of 
SIG Plc and the Nuclear 
Decommissioning Authority.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Mark Edwards
Non‑Executive Director

Tim Pile
Non‑Executive Director

Alan Coppin
Senior Independent 
Non‑Executive Director 
(retired May 2016)

Cathy Baxandall
Group Company Secretary

BOARD COMMITTEES
Audit (Chair); Remuneration; 
Nomination.

BOARD COMMITTEES
Audit; Remuneration; 
Nomination.

BOARD COMMITTEES
Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee (retired May 2016).

TERM OF OFFICE
Appointed in May 2010. 
Last re-elected in May 2016. 

TERM OF OFFICE
Appointed in October 2010. 
Last re-elected in May 2016. 

LENGTH OF SERVICE
6 years 7 months

LENGTH OF SERVICE
6 years 3 months

TERM OF OFFICE
Appointed in May 2010.  
Retired from the Board and 
as a Non-Executive Director 
in May 2016.

LENGTH OF SERVICE
6 years 
(up to date of retirement)

INDEPENDENT
Yes

INDEPENDENT
Yes

INDEPENDENT
Yes

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Chartered Accountant with 
a strong operating background 
gained in the USA, Europe and 
Asia. CEO of AIM Altitude, a 
leading supplier of cabin interiors 
for Boeing and Airbus aircraft 
on the world’s leading airlines.

Formerly CEO of the Baxi Group 
and Vice President of the 
Construction Products Association.

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Chairman of Cogent Elliott, the 
leading independent marketing 
agency; extensive cross-sector 
leadership and business experience, 
particularly in marketing and 
financial services, and formerly 
Chief Executive Officer of 
Sainsbury’s Bank. Previous 
Non-Executive Director roles 
include Cancer Research UK.

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
Significant cross-sector 
governance and management 
experience, including previous 
Non-Executive directorships at 
Berkeley Homes plc, Capital and 
Regional plc and Carillion plc. 
Previously Chairman of the 
Prince’s Foundation for the Built 
Environment. Alan is a 
Companion of the Chartered 
Management Institute. 

TERM OF OFFICE
Appointed in July 2008.  

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE
In addition to her role as 
Company Secretary, Cathy is 
General Counsel to the Marshalls 
Group and has responsibility for 
compliance and risk management. 
She also sits on the Marshalls 
pension scheme trustee board. 
She has previous experience as 
Company Secretary and Group 
Counsel with Silentnight Group, 
Thistle Hotels plc and Jacuzzi 
(UK). Qualified as a solicitor with 
Clifford Chance before becoming 
a partner in a national law firm, 
specialising in banking and 
corporate law. Graduate of 
the University of Oxford.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Chief Executive of AIM Aviation 
Holdings (which trades as 
AIM Altitude) and its group 
of companies, and Chairman 
of Atlas Fine Wines.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Deputy Chairman of the 
Royal Orthopaedic Hospital 
and Immediate Past-President 
of the Greater Birmingham 
Chambers of Commerce. 

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Crown Representative in the 
Cabinet Office (Efficiency and 
Reform Group), Trustee and 
Chairman of the Campaign Board 
for the RAF Museums and Patron 
of the Windsor Leadership Trust. 

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Charity Trustee and Board 
member of Ilkley Literature 
Festival, the Open College 
of the Arts (part of the University 
for the Creative Arts) and the 
Bedales Grants Trust Fund.

35

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCECorporate Governance Statement

 High standards of governance

The Board seeks to promote 
consistently high standards of 
governance throughout the 
Group that are recognised and 
understood by all.

BOARD OBJECTIVES 2016
•  Extend the strategy debate, establish strategy review day, review 

capital structure and articulate long term vision.

•  Develop understanding of succession planning below Board level, 

“people” related processes and objectives.

•  Establish more structure around Board and senior management 
succession planning and appraisals, and strengthen the role 
of the Nomination Committee, taking account of diversity.

•  On risk management, incorporating best practice, develop risk 

reporting and Board involvement, with particular focus on safety 
culture and cyber risk.

  Nomination Committee Report pages 42–43

• 

Improve visibility of risk assessment for projects at evaluation stage.

  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities pages 44–45

  Remuneration Committee Report pages 46–65

  Audit Committee Report pages 66–69

Strategic objectives:  

 Shareholder value   

 Relationship building    

 Brand development   

 Sustainable profitability    

 Organic expansion   

 Effective capital structure and control framework

36

WHAT WE ACHIEVED 
•  Set 2020 Strategy (articulated in presentations to investors and 
employees), held separate strategy review day for Board and 
Executive Committee in September 2016, future strategy review 
days now programmed annually.

•  Established regular reviews of capital structure; greater focus 

on assessing risk and developing mitigation strategies, particularly 
in relation to cyber security.

•  Health and safety reporting developed, with Board training and 

participation in site safety inspections.

•  Strengthened process around succession planning at Board and 
senior management level: successful handover from retiring to 
new Senior Independent Director / Remuneration Committee 
Chair, one-to-one appraisals completed.

•  Promoted and supported increased focus on “people” initiatives, 
including the establishing of consistent Group-wide employment 
procedures and policies, investment in training and development 
and improved access to pension savings.

KEY THEMES FOR 2017
•  Leading the development of corporate culture, values and 

vision across the business.

•  Work to further develop business resilience, flexibility and agility.

•  Pursue 2020 Strategy through, for example, organic growth 

and improved profitability resulting from innovation in products 
and processes, considering acquisitions and investment where 
appropriate and value adding.

•  Ensure succession planning (Board and senior management) 
is designed to align with corporate culture and good practice 
and recognises our commitment to diversity.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
Dear Shareholder,

This Corporate Governance Statement, together with the Reports 
of the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees on pages 
42 to 69, explains how Marshalls’ governance framework works and 
how we apply the principles of business integrity, high ethical values 
and professionalism in all our activities. As a Board, we recognise that 
we are accountable to shareholders for good corporate governance, 
and we seek to promote consistently high standards of governance 
throughout the Group that are recognised and understood by all.

Good governance depends on good and effective leadership 
and a healthy corporate culture, supported by robust systems 
and processes and a good understanding of risk and risk appetite. 
Your Board has continued throughout the year to engage with 
shareholders and other stakeholders, to maintain constructive 
dialogue and challenge and to focus on strategy and value. As a 
Board, we also keep abreast of developments in good governance 
and practice, such as the recommendations of the Hampton-
Alexander review on gender diversity, the Parker review on 
ethnic diversity and the FRC’s observations on corporate culture 
published in July 2016. This year, the Board and the Executive 
Committee have spent time on evaluating Marshalls’ culture 
and values, recognising that a healthy corporate culture will 
both protect and generate value. The Board has a leading role 
in fostering and influencing the positive culture and values of 
the Group by ensuring a consistency of approach and message 
from the top. The work of our Board Committees, explained in 
this report, demonstrates our commitment to openness and 
accountability, acknowledging the value of diversity and good 
succession planning, how we align reward with our values and 
strategy and how as an organisation we seek to embed our values 
across the business, recognising that there is further work to do.

During 2016, the Board conducted its first externally led Board 
evaluation. This concluded that the Board composition was 
appropriate for the business, with a good balance of skills and 

experience, ensuring a well balanced and effective Board with 
a clear and inclusive strategy and a high degree of respect and 
trust at individual and collective level. The summary of our 2016 
objectives, how we performed against them, and the objectives 
we have set for 2017 following the 2016 evaluation process, 
appears on the first page of this report. These priorities are 
closely linked to the strategic objectives of the business.

The Group’s 2015 Annual Report and Accounts were reviewed by the 
FRC’s Conduct Committee and matters arising have been reflected 
in this year’s Annual Report and Accounts. The 2016 Annual Report 
takes account of the FRC review and seeks to maintain the clarity 
and transparency of previous reports while presenting our business 
performance as effectively as possible. 

This Corporate Governance Statement, which is part of the Directors’ 
Report, has been prepared in accordance with the principles of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code published in September 2014 
(the “Code”), which the Board fully supports. The Board annually 
carries out a review of how the Code principles are applied within the 
structure, together with the processes and procedures adopted by 
the Company. The Board considers that the Company has complied 
with the relevant provisions of the Code throughout the year in 
all material respects. I can also confirm that in the opinion of the 
Directors these Annual Financial Statements present a fair, balanced 
and understandable assessment of the Group’s position and 
prospects and provide the information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model 
and strategy. The respective responsibilities of the Directors and the 
Auditor in connection with the Financial Statements are explained in 
the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities and the Auditor’s Report 
on pages 44 to 45 and 72 to 77 respectively.

Andrew Allner
Chairman

37

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCECorporate Governance Statement  – continued

Role of the Board
The Board currently comprises an Independent Non-Executive 
Chairman, 3 Non-Executive Directors and 2 Executive Directors who 
are equally responsible for the proper stewardship and leadership 
of the Company. Their biographical details are on pages 34 and 35.

Among the written Schedule of Matters Reserved for the Board, 
which is reviewed annually, are:

•  approving and monitoring progress of strategy, business plans 

and budgets;

•  approving any changes to capital, constitution or 

corporate structure;

•  approving the annual and half-yearly accounts, and the 

approval and monitoring of the internal financial control system, 
risk management, health and safety and anti-bribery policies 
and procedures;

•  Board appointments and succession planning, and setting 

Terms of Reference for Board Committees;

•  approving transactions of significant value or major 

strategic importance; and

•  remuneration matters, including major changes to pension 
schemes, the introduction of share and incentive schemes, 
and the general framework of remuneration.

The Board has delegated specific responsibilities to the Audit, 
Remuneration and Nomination Committees. The Audit Committee 
Report on pages 66 to 69 provides details of how the Board applies 
the Code in relation to financial reporting, risk management and 
internal controls. The Nomination Committee Report on pages 
42 and 43 reports on the work done, particularly in relation to 
Board and senior management succession planning, diversity 

Interaction between Board and management bodies

and Board development. The Remuneration Report on pages 46 to 
65 incorporates the Remuneration Policy to be tabled at the 2017 
Annual General Meeting, and gives details of Directors’ remuneration 
for 2017. Other Board Committees are established periodically for 
particular purposes. For example, during the year, Board Committees 
were established to approve the preliminary and half-yearly results.

Day-to-day management and the implementation of strategies 
agreed by the Board are delegated to the Executive Directors. The 
Group’s reporting structure below Board level is designed so that 
all decisions are made by the most appropriate people in a timely 
manner. Management teams report to members of the Executive 
Committee; this currently consists of 8 senior managers (of whom 
7 are male and 1 is female), including the 2 Executive Directors. 
The Board receives regular updates from the Executive Committee 
in relation to business issues and developments. These policies and 
procedures collectively enable the Board to make informed decisions 
on a range of key issues including strategy and risk management. The 
interaction between these bodies is illustrated in the chart below.

Roles of the Chairman, Chief Executive 
and Non‑Executive Directors
There is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chairman 
and Chief Executive, each of whom has annually reviewed written 
Terms of Reference. The Chairman leads the Board and sets its 
agenda, ensuring that adequate time is available for discussion of all 
agenda items, in particular strategic issues, making sure all Directors, 
particularly the Non-Executive Directors, are able to contribute, and 
maintaining a constructive relationship between the Executive and 
the Non-Executive Directors. The Chief Executive has responsibility 
for all operational matters which include the implementation 
of strategy and policies approved by the Board.

Audit  
Committee

Board

Nomination 
Committee

Group / corporate support

Remuneration 
Committee

Executive 
Directors

Chairman and CEO Terms of Reference 
www.marshalls.co.uk

Executive 
Committee

Committee Terms of Reference 
www.marshalls.co.uk

Operational 
and functional 
management

38

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016All Directors receive training as part of the annual Board 
programme, which seeks to incorporate a range of 
in-depth topics of particular relevance to the business. 
Directors are also expected to attend external courses 
and seminars as appropriate to maintain and develop 
their Board competencies.

The Senior Independent Director, who also has written Terms of 
Reference, is responsible for providing a sounding board for the 
Chairman and is an intermediary for other Non-Executive Directors. 
She is available to shareholders if they have concerns which are not 
resolved through the normal channels of contact.

The Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors were independent 
on appointment, and the Board considers each of the Non-Executive 
Directors to be independent in character and judgement in accordance 
with the principles of the Code.

At least once a year the Chairman holds a meeting with the 
Non-Executive Directors without the Executive Directors being 
present. The Non-Executive Directors also meet annually without the 
Chairman being present to appraise the Chairman’s performance.

Directors are able to ensure that any concerns they raise about 
the running of the Company or a proposed action are recorded 
in the Board minutes. If a Non-Executive Director did have any such 
concerns on resignation the Chairman would invite that Director 
to provide a written statement for circulation to the Board.

Conflicts of interest
The Board has adopted procedures for the authorisation of existing 
situations and for considering (and authorising where appropriate) 
new situations which may give rise to a conflict of interest. These 
are recorded in a Conflicts Register, reviewed by the Nomination 
Committee at least annually. Currently, the only situations 
authorised are the holding by Directors of directorships or similar 
offices with companies or organisations not connected with the 
Company where the Board has not identified any actual conflict 
of interest. The Board has reviewed the procedures and is satisfied 
that they are operating effectively.

Board composition, commitment and election 
of Directors
The Nomination Committee leads the process for Board 
appointments and makes recommendations to the Board. 
We believe our Board is of sufficient size and has an appropriate 
balance of skills and experience to meet the needs of the business. 
Individual Director evaluations, succession planning and the work 

of the Nomination Committee are commented on further in the 
Nomination Committee Report.

On appointment, Board members, in particular the Chairman and 
the Non-Executive Directors, disclose their other commitments and 
agree to allocate sufficient time to the Company to discharge their 
duties effectively and ensure that these other commitments do not 
affect their contribution. The current Board commitments of the 
Chairman and of the remaining members of the Board are shown on 
pages 34 and 35. Any conflicts of interest are dealt with in accordance 
with the Board conflicts procedures.

The Company’s Articles of Association contain powers of removal, 
appointment, election and re-election of Directors and provide that 
at least one-third of the Board must retire at each Annual General 
Meeting and each Director must retire by rotation every 3 years. 
In practice, the Company requires all Non-Executive Directors and 
Executive Directors to stand for re-election at each Annual General 
Meeting. All Directors will stand for re-election or election at the 2017 
Annual General Meeting. The terms of appointment of the current 
Directors and the Directors’ biographical details on pages 34 and 35 
show their length of service on the Board.

Board induction, development and support
New Directors receive a full, formal and tailored induction on joining 
the Board. There is an induction pack for new Directors incorporating 
the Company’s constitutional and governance documents, Group 
policies and other key information, and training is provided on the 
use of our active “virtual boardroom” board reporting tools. During 
2016, Non-Executive Directors were trained to carry out site safety 
inspections as part of the Group’s Visible Felt Leadership health 
and safety programme. Other tailored training may be arranged 
to meet individual needs, for example to update knowledge of 
developments in regulatory compliance. Typically, a new Director 
will meet the Chairman and other Non-Executive Directors in 
one-on-one sessions; he or she will have meetings with key 
management, briefings with external advisers and shareholders, 
and a programme of site visits will be arranged at which the Director 
meets site-based staff to gain a full understanding of the business.

39

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCECorporate Governance Statement  – continued

Board induction, development and support continued
Directors are expected to attend external courses and seminars as 
appropriate to maintain and develop their Board competencies. 
Training is also built into the annual Board programme, which is 
designed to cover a range of topics of particular relevance to the 
business. During 2016, there were Board briefings relating to health 
and safety, cyber risk and current issues of corporate governance 
and the new MAR regulatory regime. The Board also received senior 
management presentations in relation to business process initiatives, 
developments in HR processes and group learning, manufacturing 
operations and the Group’s marketing strategy. Non-Executive 
Directors took the opportunity to meet senior managers to discuss 
areas of particular interest. Training needs are identified through the 
Board evaluation process and through the individual one-to-one 
reviews between the Directors and the Chairman.

Directors have access to the advice and services of the Company 
Secretary and are entitled to rely on the impartial and independent 
nature of that advice and those services. The Company Secretary 
is responsible for ensuring that Board procedures are complied 
with and, through the Chairman, advises the Board on corporate 
governance matters. Both the appointment and removal of the 
Company Secretary are matters for the Board as a whole.

The Board has an approved procedure for all Directors to take 
independent professional advice at the Company’s expense. Board 
Committees are provided with sufficient resources to undertake their 
duties, including the option to appoint external advisers when they 
deem it appropriate.

Indemnities and insurance
The Company maintains directors’ and officers’ liability insurance 
cover to cover legal proceedings against its Directors and Officers 
acting in that capacity. The Group has also granted indemnities to 
its Directors to the extent permitted by law (which are qualifying 
third party indemnities within the meaning of Section 236 of the 
Companies Act 2006), and these remained in force during the year 
in relation to certain losses and liabilities that the Directors may incur 
to third parties in the course of action as Directors or employees of 
the Company, any subsidiary or associated company, or as a Director 
of the pension scheme trustee board. Neither the liability insurance 
nor the indemnities provide cover in the event of proven fraudulent 
or dishonest activity.

Board evaluation
The Company carries out a full evaluation of Board performance 
and that of its 3 principal Committees annually. As indicated in its 
2015 report, the Board decided to commission an external evaluation 
for 2016. Accordingly, external evaluators, Equity Communications, 
were appointed after a competitive tender process to conduct the 
2016 Board evaluation. Equity Communications have no other 
connection with the Company. The evaluation was carried out using 
a questionnaire, followed by one-to-one interviews with each of the 
Directors and the Company Secretary. The questionnaire was 
designed to stimulate thought and discussion rather than to deliver 
scores, and included questions about the effectiveness of Executive 
and Non-Executive Directors, and the performance of the Chairman. 

The Senior Independent Director separately reviewed the Chairman’s 
performance with other Non-Executive Directors. The results of the 
evaluation were then reviewed by the Chairman and the Company 
Secretary and discussed by the Board. The Board also reviewed 
progress against the priorities identified for 2016 from the 2015 
evaluation process. The outcomes of the evaluation process 
and the themes that have emerged for focus in 2017 are 
highlighted on page 36.

The Board welcomed the independent assessment provided 
by Equity Communications, which confirmed that the Board was 
working very effectively and that there was a good level of challenge 
and support. The evaluation also demonstrated that the internally-
led Board evaluation process in previous years had been successful 
in improving Board effectiveness. The Board expects to return 
to an internally led process in 2017.

Board meetings and attendance

Board 

Audit
 Committee

Remuneration
Committee

Nomination
 Committee

Andrew Allner 
(Non-Executive)

Janet Ashdown 
(Non-Executive)

Jack Clarke

Martyn Coffey

Alan Coppin 
(Non-Executive)

Mark Edwards 
(Non-Executive)

Tim Pile 
(Non-Executive)

7/7

7/7

7/7

7/7

3/7

7/7

7/7

–

4/4

–

–

1/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

–

–

2/4

4/4

4/4

2/2

2/2

–

–

1/2

2/2

2/2

The Board met 7 times in full session during 2016. In addition, the 
Audit Committee met 4 times, the Remuneration Committee met 
4 times and the Nomination Committee met twice during the year. 
There were also Board Committee meetings in connection with the 
issue of financial results and the updating of Group banking details.

The Chief Executive and the Finance Director are usually invited 
to attend Audit Committee meetings, although the Audit Committee 
also meets the auditor without any Executive Director being present. 
The Chief Executive is invited to attend Remuneration Committee 
meetings where appropriate. The Company Secretary is also Secretary 
to the Board Committees and attends meetings for this purpose.

Alan Coppin retired from the Board in May 2016 and attended 
all meetings up to the date of his retirement. In 2017 there are 
7 Board, 4 Audit Committee, 4 Remuneration Committee and 
1 Nomination Committee meetings scheduled, with an additional 
day set aside for strategy. Outside this formal Board schedule, 
Board members are expected to participate in site visits, and are 
invited to other events such as the Group’s two-day annual 
management conference.

40

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016How we assess our performance, prospects and viability
The Group has in place a comprehensive financial review process, 
including detailed annual budgets, business plans and regular 
forecasting. There are a range of performance indicators which are 
tracked by management on a daily, weekly and monthly basis, as 
appropriate, and addressed through a programme of operational 
meetings and action plans. All Directors receive regular and timely 
information to enable them to perform their duties, including 
information on the Group’s operational and financial performance, 
customer service, health and safety performance and forward trends. 

The Board reviews at each regular Board meeting the monthly 
financial results, taking account of performance indicators and the 
detailed annual business plan and budget. The Board also considers 
forward trends and performance against other key indicators, including 
areas where performance departs from forecasts, and contingency 
plans. The Board reviews and discusses medium and long-term strategy 
on a regular basis and meets at least annually with the Executive 
Committee to review strategy. It also holds separate meetings with 
individual members of senior management to ensure the Board 
receives regular updates on current business and strategic issues. 

In this way, the Board assesses the prospects of the Group using all 
the information at its disposal, and considering historic performance, 
forecast performance for the current year, and longer-term forecasts 
over the 3-year business planning cycle as appropriate. In approving 
these accounts the Board has considered these matters in detail in 
order to be able to give the Viability Statement on page 21. The Board 
has a reasonable expectation that the Group is able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due for at least the next 
12 months.

Risk management and internal control
The Board acknowledges its responsibility for determining the nature 
and extent of the significant risks it is willing to take in achieving its 
strategic objectives, and for the Group’s system of internal control. 
The Board has during 2016 carried out a review of the effectiveness of 
the Group’s risk management and internal controls systems covering 
all material controls, including financial, operational and compliance 
controls. The Strategic Report comments in detail (pages 20 to 24) on 
the nature of the principal risks facing the Group, in particular those 
that would threaten our business model, future performance, solvency 
or liquidity and the measures in place to mitigate them. In conducting 
its review, the Board has included a robust assessment of these risks, 
particularly operational risks that might affect the assessment of the 
Group’s viability. The Board’s risk review also incorporates an element 
of stress testing, by envisaging scenarios that might arise during 
the financial year and / or the planning cycle, and considering, with 
financial impact modelling where appropriate, the likely effect in the 
business and its prospects. The Audit Committee Report on pages 66 
to 69 describes the internal control system and how it is managed 
and monitored. The Board acknowledges that such systems are 
designed to manage, rather than eliminate, the risk of failure to 
achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against material mis-statement or loss.

Relations with shareholders
The Board places great emphasis on good communications 
with shareholders. The Chief Executive and the Finance Director 
meet regularly with major shareholders to discuss the Group’s 
performance, strategic issues and shareholder investment objectives, 
and also periodically arrange site visits for investors. Reports of these 
meetings and any shareholder communications during the year are 
provided to the Board. During 2016, 103 such meetings were held, 
at which 72 of the Group’s institutional shareholders were represented. 
This approach ensures the views of major shareholders are understood 
by all Directors.

The Board also regularly receives copies of analysts’ and brokers’ 
briefings. The Chairman is available to meet major shareholders on 
request to discuss governance and strategy. The Senior Independent 
Director is also available to meet shareholders separately if requested. 
When appropriate, the Non-Executive Directors attend meetings or 
site visits with major shareholders and would be available to meet 
major shareholders if a meeting were requested.

There is a regular reporting and announcement schedule to ensure 
that matters of importance affecting the Group are communicated 
to investors, and the Annual and Half-yearly Reports, together with 
the Marshalls website, are substantial means of communication with 
all shareholders during the year.

Annual General Meeting
The Notice of Annual General Meeting is dispatched to shareholders, 
together with explanatory notes or a circular on items of special 
business, at least 20 working days before the meeting. It is the 
Company’s practice to propose separate resolutions on each 
substantially separate issue, including a resolution relating to the 
Report and Accounts, and to put all resolutions to an electronic poll 
at the Annual General Meeting. All Directors normally attend the 
meeting, including the Chairs of the Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees, who are available to answer questions. 
The Board welcomes questions from shareholders who have an 
opportunity to raise issues informally or formally before or at the 
Annual General Meeting.

For each resolution the proxy appointment forms provide 
shareholders with the option to direct their proxy vote either for or 
against the resolution or to withhold their vote. The proxy form and 
any announcement of the results of a vote make it clear that a “vote 
withheld” is not a vote in law and will not be counted in the calculation 
of the proportion of the votes for and against the resolution.

All valid proxy appointments are properly recorded and counted. 
Information on the number of shares represented by proxy, the proxy 
votes for and against each resolution, and the number of shares in 
respect of which the vote was withheld for each resolution, together 
with the voting result, are given at the meeting and made available 
on the Company’s website.

Andrew Allner
Chairman
15 March 2017

41

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCENomination Committee Report

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to report to shareholders on the main activities of 
the Committee and how it has performed its duties during 2016. 
I chair Nomination Committee meetings, but would not do so 
where the Committee was dealing with my own re-appointment 
or replacement as Chairman.

Andrew Allner
Chair of the Nomination Committee

The Group’s policies are designed to 
support positively the widening of 
opportunity for talented individuals 
regardless of gender, ethnicity or 
social background.

HIGHLIGHTS OF 2016
•  The Committee reviewed Board succession planning against the 

Group’s 2020 Strategy objectives.

•  The Committee developed the process for individual performance 

and development reviews at Board level.

•  The Board evaluation carried out independently by Equity 

Communications concluded that the Board was the right size for 
the business and was very well balanced, with a good mix of skills 
and experience.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  Succession planning will continue to be organised against a clear 
timetable to preserve continuity whilst regularly refreshing the 
composition of the Board.

•  Recruitment and succession planning will recognise the changing 

needs of the business and its long-term strategic priorities.

•  Recruitment and succession planning will be designed to incorporate 

fully the Group’s inclusivity and diversity objectives.

•  Recruitment and succession planning will be aligned with 

a healthy and well understood corporate culture.

NOMINATION COMMITTEE MEMBERS
 • Andrew Allner – Chair

 • Janet Ashdown

 • Mark Edwards

 • Tim Pile

42

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Role and responsibilities
The Board’s Nomination Committee fulfils a vital role in terms of succession 
planning and Board performance. Its Terms of Reference include:

•  Board succession planning, including size, composition and 
balance of skills and experience, giving due weight to the 
achievement of diversity in its widest sense;

•  recruitment and induction of candidates for appointment 

to the Board;

•  reviewing individual performance evaluation outcomes for 
Directors standing for election or re-election in advance 
of the Annual General Meeting; and

•  monitoring conflicts, reviewing the Board conflicts policy, 
maintaining the conflicts register and considering any 
new notifications.

The performance of the Committee was evaluated as part of the 
externally led Board evaluation process in 2016, and the Committee 
Terms of Reference were also reviewed.

During the year the Nomination Committee held 2 scheduled 
meetings, and additional meetings and discussions in connection 
with succession planning and recruitment were held by telephone. 
Attendance at meetings is shown on page 40.

Recruitment and succession planning
The philosophy of the Nomination Committee is that recruitment 
and succession planning should reflect the changing strategic needs 
and objectives of the Group, both now and in the future, as well as 
being an important factor in the development of a strong corporate 
culture. In this context, we are wholly committed to achieving 
diversity in its widest sense in the composition of the Board and 
senior management, and we welcome the increased focus on 
diversity from shareholders and other commentators. The Group’s 
policies are designed to support positively the widening of 
opportunity for talented individuals regardless of gender, ethnicity 
or social background. The Strategic Report includes details of 
current gender ratios and some of the measures taken in 2016 
to help achieve our objectives on page 26.

During 2016, the Committee reviewed Board succession planning 
against the 2020 Strategy objectives of the Group, and updated its 
written succession plan accordingly. It also developed the process 
for individual performance and development reviews at Board level. 
The 2016 Board evaluation carried out by Equity Communications 
was very positive in its comments on the composition and skills of 
the Board, concluding that the current Board size was appropriate, 
and that the range of skills and experience was well balanced, with 
all Directors making a valuable contribution to Board proceedings 
and to the wider business. 

During 2017, the work of the Committee will give priority to an 
organised timetable for Board succession, taking care to preserve the 
good balance between Non-Executive and Executive Directors and 
the strengths identified in our external Board evaluation. We will 
increase our focus on inclusivity and diversity objectives both at 
Board and senior management level. In particular, in fostering 
corporate culture, we recognise the importance of Board leadership 

and we are fully engaged with the ongoing initiatives in the business 
as a whole to improve diversity ratios and gender balance. We will do 
this through meetings and discussions with management, 
monitoring progress and ensuring that these principles are followed 
in briefs to external recruitment agencies and search consultants.

Non-Executive Directors are appointed for specific terms, subject 
to re-appointment and the Company’s Articles of Association and 
subject to the Companies Act provisions relating to the removal 
of a Director. The Committee’s framework for succession planning 
is designed to phase future recruitment so that the composition 
of the Board can be refreshed whilst ensuring continuity.

Re‑appointment of Directors
Each Non-Executive Director was, on joining, provided with a 
detailed description of his or her role and responsibilities, and 
received a detailed business induction. All Directors have an annual 
one-to-one development review meeting with the Chairman to 
appraise performance, set personal objectives and discuss any 
development and training needs to enable them to continue to add 
value to the Board, with an assessment of individual and collective 
performance with contributions from senior management and other 
business stakeholders.

Before any Director is proposed for re-election, or has their 
appointment renewed, the Committee considers the outcome 
of the reviews to ensure that the Director continues to be effective 
and demonstrates commitment to the role. The Chairman provides 
an explanation to shareholders as to why the Director should be 
re-elected and confirming that a formal performance evaluation 
has taken place when the resolution to re-elect is circulated.

It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors can only hold 
1 external listed company Non-Executive directorship. Voluntary 
service on the governing board of a social, trade or charitable 
organisation is also permitted. Details of the external appointments 
held by the Executive Directors are included in the biographical 
notes on page 34.

During the year, I ceased to be Senior Independent Non-Executive 
Director and Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee at Northgate plc. 
There have been no other changes to my own other commitments 
during the year, which are also listed on page 34.

Governance
The Committee has acted in accordance with the principles of the 
Code in developing and applying its succession plans and policies. 
The Committee’s effectiveness, including the effective application 
of those principles, is assessed as part of the annual Board evaluation 
process. The framework for the refreshment of skills, experience and 
diversity to support the needs of the business and its stakeholders 
in the future is transparent and well understood.

Andrew Allner
Chair
15 March 2017

43

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEStatement of Directors’ Responsibilities in Respect of the Annual Report 
and the Financial Statements

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and 
the Group and Parent Company Financial Statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Parent 
Company Financial Statements for each financial year. Under that law they 
are required to prepare the Group Financial Statements in accordance 
with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation, and have elected to prepare the Parent Company 
Financial Statements in accordance with UK Accounting Standards, 
including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”.

Under company law the Directors must not approve the Financial 
Statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view 
of the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of their profit 
or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group and Parent 
Company Financial Statements, the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply 

them consistently;

•  make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable 

and prudent;

•  for the Group Financial Statements, state whether they have been 

prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and explain the Parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy, at any time, the 
financial position of the Parent Company and enable them to ensure 
that its Financial Statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. 
They have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably 
open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent 
and detect fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also 
responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, 
Directors’ Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance 
Statement that comply with that law and those regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of 
the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation 
in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the Directors on the annual 
financial report
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of this Directors’ 
Report and whose names and functions are listed on pages 34 and 35 
confirm that, to the best of each of their knowledge:

•  for the Parent Company Financial Statements, state whether 

•  the Financial Statements, prepared in accordance with the 

applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject 
to any material departures disclosed and explained in the Parent 
Company Financial Statements; and

•  prepare the Financial Statements on the going concern basis 

unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and the Parent 
Company will continue in business.

In preparing the Group Financial Statements, IAS 1 requires that Directors:

•  properly select and apply accounting policies; 

applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of 
the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Company 
and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as 
a whole; 

•  the Strategic Report contained in this Annual Report includes a fair 
review of the development and performance of the business and 
the position of the Company and the Group taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties 
that they face; and

•  present information, including accounting policies, in 

•  the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, is 

a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

•  provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific 

requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable users to understand 
the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions 
on the entity’s financial position and financial performance; and

•  make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue as 

a going concern.

fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy.

Disclosure of information to the auditor
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of this Directors’ 
Report confirm that, so far as they are each aware, there is no relevant 
audit information of which the Company’s Auditor is unaware, 
and each Director has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have 
taken as a Director to make himself / herself aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the Company’s Auditor is aware of 
that information.

44

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Going concern
The Directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing 
these Financial Statements in accordance with the Financial 
Reporting Council’s “Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control 
and Related Financial and Business Reporting”, issued in September 
2014. The Directors considered that it was appropriate to do so, 
having reviewed any uncertainties that may affect the Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern for at least the next 12 months 
from the date these Financial Statements were approved.

Cautionary statement and Directors’ liability
This Annual Report 2016 has been prepared for, and only for, the 
members of the Company, as a body, and no other persons. Neither 
the Company nor the Directors accept or assume any liability to any 
person to whom this Annual Report is shown or into whose hands it 
may come except to the extent that such liability arises and may not 
be excluded under English law. Accordingly, any liability to a person 
who has demonstrated reliance on any untrue or misleading 
statement or omission shall be determined in accordance with 
Section 90A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

This Annual Report contains certain forward-looking statements 
with respect to the Group’s financial condition, results, strategy, plans 
and objectives. These statements are not forecasts or guarantees of 
future performance and involve risk and uncertainty because they 
relate to events and depend upon circumstances that will occur 
in the future.

There are a number of factors that could cause actual results or 
developments to differ materially from those expressed, implied or 
forecast by these forward-looking statements. All forward-looking 
statements in this Annual Report are based on information known to 
the Group as at the date of this Annual Report and the Group has no 
obligation publicly to update or revise any forward-looking statements, 
whether as a result of new information or future events. Nothing 
in this Annual Report should be construed as a profit forecast.

Annual General Meeting
The Notice convening the Annual General Meeting to be held at 
the Cedar Court Hotel, Ainley Top, Huddersfield HD3 3RH at 11.00 am 
on Wednesday 10 May 2017, together with explanatory notes on the 
resolutions to be proposed, is contained in a circular to be sent to 
shareholders with this Annual Report.

By Order of the Board:

Cathy Baxandall
Group Company Secretary
15 March 2017

45

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCE2016 PERFORMANCE

Strategic objective

Delivering sustainable 
growth to increase 
profitability

Maximise operational 
efficiencies to generate 
cash

Meet customer service 
expectations

Measure

EPS

Outcome

EPS: 18.95p (+32%) 
(100% target achieved) 

OCF

OCF: £57.9m 
(96.96% target achieved)

Ensure a safe workplace for 
our employees

Health and safety 
accident reduction

Customer
Service Index

Target achieved

Target achieved

AT A GLANCE PERFORMANCE IN 2016 AGAINST STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES 
LINKED TO REMUNERATION
•  Strategic objectives are focused on improving operational 

efficiency, promoting innovation and strengthening the Marshalls 
brand through excellence in service and systems.

•  Remuneration linked to delivering long-term sustainable growth 

through improvement in profitability and cash generation.

• 

Incentive awards require achievement of significant EPS growth 
and an operating cash flow (“OCF”) target as proxies for 
measuring progress.

•  Brand, market leadership and employee engagement objectives 
incorporated through non-financial criteria (customer service and 
health and safety improvement).

•  2016 targets set for maximum performance took account of “best 
case” consensus expectations and incorporated significant stretch 
against these expectations and the Group’s 2016 budget.

•  Payment of bonus balanced with shareholder returns. The regular 
dividend increased by 24 per cent (in line with our dividend policy) 
and, including the supplementary dividend, the overall dividend 
growth for 2016, was 30 per cent.

FUTURE OBJECTIVES
•  Obtain approval for new Remuneration Policy in 2017, 

maintaining strong links with performance.

• 

Implement Policy, ensuring it is aligned with the interests 
of stakeholders in the widest sense.

•  Continue to follow best practice principles in remuneration matters.

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE MEMBERS
 • Janet Ashdown – Chair

 • Andrew Allner

 • Mark Edwards

 • Tim Pile

Remuneration Committee Report

Dear Shareholder,

I am writing to you as the new Chair of Marshalls’ Remuneration 
Committee, having succeeded Alan Coppin on his retirement in 
May 2016. I am pleased to report on how the Committee has 
carried out its objectives and responsibilities during 2016.

This report is divided into three: an introduction and “at a glance” 
summary of our activities, the proposed 2017 Remuneration Policy, 
and how it differs from the 2014 Policy, and our Annual Remuneration 
Report, showing how our Policy was applied during the year and 
the outcomes, particularly for Executive reward.

Janet Ashdown
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

  Remuneration Committee Report pages 46–48

 Remuneration Policy pages 49–57

  Annual Remuneration Report pages 58–65

Find out more online 
www.marshalls.co.uk/remuneration

46

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
 
Remuneration Policy
Our Remuneration Policy was last submitted to shareholders in 
May 2014 and will expire in May 2017. On my appointment I therefore 
reviewed the current Policy with the Committee. The conclusion 
the Committee reached was that the current Policy in substance 
remained fit for purpose to support the implementation of the 
Company’s strategy over the next 3-year Policy period. 

In reaching this decision the Committee took into account 
the following:

• 

latest guidance from the Investment Association, the Executive 
Remuneration Working Group’s July 2016 report and other 
shareholder and investor bodies;

•  the latest GC100 report on the implementation of the 

2013 Regulations;

•  the Company’s performance against the main KPIs over the current 

Policy period; and

•  the annual votes of shareholders on how the Committee has 

operated the current Policy (Remuneration Report voting approval of 
over 90 per cent in each year since the current Policy was introduced).

We also sought the views of major shareholders in reaching this 
conclusion. We will therefore be putting forward a Remuneration 
Policy for shareholders to approve at our AGM in May 2017 that is 
consistent with the previous Policy. The only material change that 
the Committee is proposing to make on the renewal of the Policy 
is to increase the minimum shareholding requirement to 200 per cent 

of salary for Executive Directors other than the Chief Executive 
(who was already at 200 per cent). The full Policy is set out in 
Section 2 of this Report.

Remuneration advisers
During 2016, the Committee also reviewed the appointment of its 
remuneration advisers, and carried out a competitive retendering of 
the work. The tender process included a full review of remuneration 
policy, the suitability and operation of the Group’s incentive schemes 
and Executive remuneration generally. Following this process, the 
Committee re-appointed PricewaterhouseCoopers as its external 
remuneration adviser.

BEIS Green Paper on Executive Pay
The Committee and the Board, having carefully considered the 
proposals in the Green Paper issued in November 2016, submitted a 
detailed response to the Government’s consultation in February 2017. 
Whatever the outcome of the consultation, the Committee would 
expect to continue to follow best practice in relation to Executive pay 
structure, engagement with shareholders and other stakeholders and 
reporting on remuneration matters. 

Salary increases for 2017
In line with the current and the new Policy, the Committee resolved 
to increase the salary of the Executive Directors with effect from 
1 January 2017 by 2 per cent, which is in line with the inflation-based 
percentage applied generally to salaries for the wider workforce. Fees 
for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors were also increased by 
the same percentage.

Summary of activities during 2016

Date 

Task

February 2016

Review 2015 bonus forecast and status of previous years’ incentive scheme awards (MIP, LTIP). 

March 2016

July 2016

August 2016

October 2016

Determine detailed targets for performance-related incentive scheme awards for the 2016 financial year (under MIP) 
by reference to 2016 strategic objectives.

Review remuneration reporting regulations for 2015 Annual Remuneration Report (including any changes 
to Remuneration Policy).

Following audited accounts approval, review performance against incentive scheme targets, and approve 
Element A and Element B bonus awards under the MIP for the 2015 financial year; assess vesting levels of 2013 
LTIP awards and approve arrangements for LTIP awards vesting in March 2016.

Review and approve draft Remuneration Report to shareholders, checking it makes proper disclosure of remuneration. 

Review CEO expenditure against expenses policy; approve extension of current expenses policy.

Remuneration adviser tender process; review appropriate comparator/sector group for remuneration purposes.

Benchmarking of Executive and Non-Executive packages in line with current Policy; consider appropriateness and 
relevance of Policy and incentive schemes (with external advice); and write to shareholders regarding renewal of 
Remuneration Policy in 2017.

Review contractual termination commitments; make recommendations on Executive Directors and 
Chairman’s remuneration.

December 2016

Review Group remuneration trends and any changes in employee pay and benefits; review detailed 
remuneration proposals for Executive Directors and senior managers.

Review Board expenses policy and expenses paid.

Terms of Reference and Committee performance evaluation review. 

47

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCERemuneration Committee Report  – continued

Statement of shareholder voting
The table below shows the May 2016 Annual General Meeting voting results on the resolutions relating to remuneration.

For and discretion

For and
discretion as a
percentage of
votes cast

Against as a
percentage of
votes cast

Against

Withheld

Resolution 12 
(Remuneration Report)

Votes 

146,377,827

98.39

2,392,360

1.61

2,026,973

The Committee believes the percentage of votes in favour of 
the Remuneration Report and the wider share plan initiatives 
shows that shareholders remain very supportive of the Group’s 
remuneration arrangements.

Remuneration disclosure
Our Remuneration Report has been prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2008 and Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium-sized 
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) 
Regulations 2013. It also meets the requirements of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code and the UK Listing Authority’s Listing Rules and 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules.

Shareholder engagement
The Committee is supportive of the principle of active engagement 
with shareholders and other stakeholders and transparent reporting 
of remuneration. As Chair, I welcome dialogue, and the Committee 
will continue to seek opportunities to improve the way in which 
our policies and their implementation can be seen to support our 
strategy for the benefit of shareholders, the wider workforce, our 
customers and other stakeholder groups. We believe that the 
current approach strikes a good balance.

We are pleased that the design of the MIP, introduced in 2014 to 
replace the 2005 LTIP, continues to meet best practice guidance 
for long-term incentive plans, including extended holding periods, 
deferred bonus, malus and clawback and targets that are clearly 
aligned with shareholder interests.

I would like to thank our shareholders for their continued support, 
and also record thanks to my predecessor, Alan Coppin, for his 
effective leadership of the Committee over the past 6 years. I will be 
available at the Company’s Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2017 
to answer any questions on our Policy, its application and this 
Remuneration Report.

Janet Ashdown
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
15 March 2017

48

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Remuneration Policy

The Remuneration Committee is required to put its new 
Remuneration Policy to a formal shareholder vote at the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2017. This new Policy is intended 
to apply for the 3 years beginning on the date of approval at the 
2017 Annual General Meeting. 

The Remuneration Committee, having reviewed its current 
Remuneration Policy and invited shareholder comment, concluded 
that the current Policy in substance remained fit for purpose to support 
the implementation of the Company’s strategy over the next 3-year 
Policy period. The new Remuneration Policy set out below has 
therefore not materially changed from the current Policy. 

Overview of the new Policy 
The Committee’s policy is to target a remuneration package that is at 
around median, for median performance, and in the upper quartile 
for exceptional performance, and which is closely linked with the 
Company’s strategic objectives. In setting all elements of remuneration 
the Committee is advised by independent consultants and periodically 
uses data from external research into the salaries and benefits paid 
by companies of a comparable size and complexity to the Company. 

The aim of the Policy is to attract, retain and continue to 
motivate talented Executive Directors while aligning remuneration 
with shareholder interests and with the achievement of strategic 
performance objectives. This is achieved by balancing a basic fixed 
package, which is periodically benchmarked against a comparator 
group, with the opportunity to achieve upper quartile remuneration 
from a combination of stretching but achievable incentives. The 
terms of reference for the Committee also include the responsibility 
for setting the policy on incentive reward for senior employees, 
in particular those who could have a material impact on the risk 
profile of the Group. The Committee has, in the design and 
application of the Company’s variable performance related incentive 
plan, incorporated risk adjustment mechanisms to encourage 
consistent and sustainable levels of Company performance and to 
ensure, when selecting performance conditions and the level of 
challenge within those conditions, that they support the long-term 
future of the Company. In reviewing its policy and determining 
remuneration the Committee also considers the wider economic 
conditions and pay and reward packages elsewhere in its sector and 
within the business. 

Policy table

Element

Purpose and how it 
supports the strategy

Operation

Fixed remuneration

Salary

Base salary 
recognises the 
market value of 
the Executive’s 
role, skills, 
responsibilities, 
performance and 
experience.

An Executive Director’s basic salary is set on 
appointment and reviewed annually or when 
there is a change in position or responsibility. 

When determining an appropriate level of 
salary, the Committee considers: 

•  general salary rises for employees; 

•  remuneration practices within the Group; 

•  any change in scope, role and responsibilities; 

•  the general performance of the Group; 

•  the experience of the relevant Director; 

•  the economic environment; and 

•  whether a benchmarking exercise is appropriate 
(using salaries within the ranges paid by the 
companies in the comparator groups 
for remuneration benchmarking).

Individuals who are recruited or promoted to 
the Board may, on occasion, have their salaries set 
below the targeted policy level until they become 
established in their role. In such cases subsequent 
increases in salary may be higher than the general 
rises for employees until the target positioning 
is achieved. 

Pension

To enable 
Executive 
Directors to 
make appropriate 
provision for 
retirement.

Executive Directors are entitled to join the defined 
contribution scheme operated by Marshalls. 
The Company contributes at an agreed percentage 
of basic salary. 

Executive Directors may take a pensions allowance in 
place of the Company’s contribution to the Scheme. 

Pension allowances are excluded for the purposes 
of calculating any other element of remuneration 
based on a percentage of salary. 

Maximum

Typically, the base salaries of Executive Directors in 
post at the start of the Policy period and who 
remain in the same role throughout the Policy 
period will be increased by a similar percentage to 
the average annual percentage increase in salaries 
of all other employees in the Group. The exceptions 
to this rule may be where:

•  an individual’s package is below market level and 
a decision is taken to increase base pay to reflect 
proven competence in the role; or

•  there is a material increase in scope or 
responsibility in the individual’s role. 

The Committee ensures that maximum salary levels 
are positioned in line with companies of a similar 
size and validated against industry / sector peers, 
so that they are competitive. 

The Committee intends to review the comparators 
periodically and may add or remove companies 
from the group as it considers appropriate. 
Any changes to the comparator groups will be 
explained in the report on the implementation of 
Remuneration Policy in the following financial year. 

The maximum Company contribution or pension 
allowance is 20% of salary.

49

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCERemuneration Policy  – continued

Policy table continued

Element

Purpose and how it 
supports the strategy

Operation

Fixed remuneration continued

Benefits

The Company 
is required to 
provide benefits 
in order to be 
competitive and 
to ensure it is able 
to recruit and 
retain Executive 
Directors.

Benefits include car or car allowance, health 
insurance, life assurance, income protection 
and membership of the Group’s employee share 
plans (the Executive Directors will also be eligible to 
participate in any other all employee plan operated 
by the Company from time to time). 

The Committee recognises the need to maintain 
suitable flexibility in the benefits provided to 
ensure it is able to support the objective of 
attracting and retaining personnel in order to 
deliver the Group strategy. Additional benefits may 
therefore be offered such as relocation allowances 
on recruitment. 

Maximum

The maximum is the cost of providing the relevant 
benefits as described.

Element

Purpose and how it 
supports the strategy

Operation

Variable performance‑based remuneration

Maximum

Performance conditions

Management 
Incentive 
Plan (“MIP”)  
Element A

Enabling the 
successful 
implementation of 
Group strategy 
through setting 
relevant targets 
to measure 
Executive Director 
performance. 
Aligns the interests 
of Executives with 
shareholders and 
contributes to the 
retention of key 
individuals by 
ensuring that 
Executives take 
part of their annual 
bonus in shares or 
share-linked units 
rather than cash. 

Annual performance conditions and 
targets are set at the beginning of the 
plan year. 

Maximum 
150% of 
salary 

As well as determining the performance 
conditions, targets and relative weighting, 
the Committee will also determine, within 
the approved range, the level of target 
bonus at the beginning of the plan year. 
Upon assessment of performance by the 
Committee, a contribution will be made 
by the Company into the participant’s 
plan account and 50% of the cumulative 
balance will be paid in cash. Any remaining 
balance will be converted into shares 
or share-linked units. 

100% of the balance in the final year 
of the plan will be paid in shares to the 
participant. During the plan period, 
50% of the retained balance is at risk 
of forfeiture based on a minimum level 
of performance determined annually 
by the Committee.

Full details of the relevant targets and 
their weighting, and how they have 
been measured, will be reported in the 
Remuneration Report for the relevant 
financial year. 

The Committee may award dividend 
equivalents on shares or share-linked 
units held under the Plan to Plan 
participants to the extent that they vest. 

An award under the Plan is subject to satisfying relevant 
performance conditions and targets determined 
annually by the Remuneration Committee by reference 
to financial and non-financial objectives that are closely 
linked to the strategy of the business and may also 
contain individual performance objectives, measured 
over a period of one financial year. 

A minimum of 50% of the bonus is based 
on financial performance measures. 

The Committee is of the opinion that given the 
commercial sensitivity arising in relation to the detailed 
financial targets used for the bonus, disclosing precise 
targets for the Plan in advance would not be in 
shareholder interests. Targets, performance achieved 
and awards made will be published at the end of 
the performance period so shareholders can fully 
assess the basis for any pay-outs under the Plan. 

In exceptional circumstances the Committee 
retains the discretion to: 

•  change the performance measures and targets 
and the weighting attached to the performance 
measures and targets part-way through a 
performance year if there is a significant and 
material event which causes the Committee to 
believe the original measures, weightings and 
targets are no longer appropriate; and 

•  make downward or upward adjustments to the 
amount of bonus contribution earned resulting 
from the application of the performance 
measures, if the Committee believes that the 
bonus outcomes are not a fair and accurate 
reflection of business performance. 

Any adjustments or discretion applied by the 
Committee will be fully disclosed in the following 
year’s Remuneration Report. 

The Plan contains malus and clawback provisions.

50

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Element

MIP 
Element B

Purpose and how it 
supports the strategy

Operation

Maximum

Performance conditions

To link variable pay 
to achievement of 
annual financial 
and business 
objectives. 

To promote 
long-term 
shareholding 
in the Company 
and strengthen 
alignment 
between interests 
of Executive 
Directors and 
senior managers 
and those of 
shareholders. 

Annual targets set by reference to financial, 
strategic and operational objectives by the 
Remuneration Committee. 

Maximum 
100% of 
salary 

Awards are made annually in shares. 
Awards are subject to continued 
employment for 3 years. 

Awards, once vested (net of tax), may 
not be sold for a further 2 years. 

There is a financial underpin which, if not 
achieved over 3 years results in the loss 
of up to 50% of unvested awards. 

Details of the performance conditions, 
targets and their level of satisfaction for the 
year being reported on will be set out in 
the Remuneration Report for the relevant 
financial year. The Committee may award 
dividend equivalents on shares or 
share-linked units held under the Plan 
to Plan participants to the extent that 
they vest. 

An award under the Plan is subject to satisfying 
relevant performance conditions and targets 
determined annually by the Remuneration 
Committee by reference to financial and 
non-financial objectives that are closely linked to 
the strategy of the business and may also contain 
individual performance objectives, measured over 
a period of one financial year. 

The Committee takes the same view on commercial 
sensitivity as for Element A of the MIP. 

The discretions set out above for Element A 
also apply to Element B.

Any adjustments or discretion applied by the 
Committee will be fully disclosed in the following 
year’s Remuneration Report. 

The plan contains malus and clawback provisions.

Minimum shareholding requirement
The Committee has adopted minimum shareholding requirements for Executive Directors, who must build up over a 5-year period and then 
subsequently hold a shareholding equivalent to a minimum of 200 per cent of base salary. Adherence to these guidelines is a condition 
of continued participation in the equity incentive arrangements. This policy ensures that the interests of Executive Directors and those of 
shareholders are closely aligned. In addition, Executive Directors are required to retain 50 per cent of the post-tax amount of vested shares 
from the Company incentive plans until the minimum shareholding requirement is met and maintained. 

The following table sets out the minimum shareholding requirements: 

Role

Chief Executive Officer

Other Directors

Shareholding requirement (percentage of salary)

200%

200%

The Committee retains the discretion to increase the shareholding requirements.

Malus and clawback 
Malus is the adjustment of Company Element A contributions or the balance in a participant’s Element A Plan Account or unvested Element B 
awards because of the occurrence of one or more circumstances listed below. The adjustment may result in the value being reduced to nil. 

Clawback is the recovery of payments made under Element A of the MIP or vested Element B awards as a result of the occurrence of one or 
more circumstances listed below. Clawback may apply to all or part of a participant’s payment under Element A of the MIP or an Element B 
award and may be effected, among other means, by requiring the transfer of shares, payment of cash or reduction of awards or bonuses. 

The circumstances in which malus and clawback could apply are as follows:

•  discovery of a material misstatement resulting in an adjustment in the audited accounts of the Group or any Group company; 

• 

if the assessment of any performance condition or condition in respect of a Company Element A contribution or Element B award was 
based on error, or inaccurate or misleading information; 

•  the discovery that any information used to determine the Company Element A contribution or Element B award was based on error, 

or inaccurate or misleading information; 

•  action or conduct of a participant which amounts to fraud or gross misconduct; or 

•  events or the behaviour of a participant have led to the censure of a Group company by a regulatory authority or have had a significant 

detrimental impact on the reputation of any Group company provided that the Board is satisfied that the relevant participant was 
responsible for the censure or reputational damage and that the censure or reputational damage is attributable to the participant. 

51

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCERemuneration Policy  – continued

Malus and clawback continued

Malus

Clawback

Up to the date of a payment under the Plan

To the end of the 3-year vesting period 

2 years post the date of any payment under the Plan

2 years post vesting

Element A

Element B

The Committee believes that the rules of the Plan provide sufficient powers to enforce malus and clawback where required. 

Total remuneration opportunity 

In future years, the total remuneration opportunity under the Policy for each of the Executive Directors at 3 different levels of performance is shown below: 

Chief Executive

Finance Director

Key

  Salary, benefits and pension

  MIP Element A

  MIP Element B

Key

  Salary, benefits and pension

  MIP Element A

  MIP Element B

33%

40%

27%

Outperformance

33%

40%

27%

Outperformance

42%

35%

23%

Target

42%

35% 23%

Target

100%

Below threshold

100% Below threshold

0

500

1,000

(£’000)

1,500

2,000

0

500

1,000

(£’000)

1,500

2,000

Notes: 
(a)  Base salary, benefits and pension information is taken from the single figure remuneration table in the 2016 Annual Remuneration Report. The benefits value reflects 
a fully expensed company car, medical insurance and any other taxable benefits and pension includes the level of pensions allowance paid instead of contractual 
employer pension contributions. 

(b)  Achievement of performance targets in line with expectations will result in 70 per cent of the annual award under the MIP. 

(c)  The minimum assumes a performance that fails to meet the threshold for Element A and Element B so is the level below which no variable pay under the MIP is earned. 

(d)  The maximum represents the full 250 per cent of salary potential under the MIP. 

Pay at risk
The charts below set out the single figure for each Executive Director based on whether the elements remain ‘at risk’. For example:

•  payment is subject to continuing employment for a period;

•  performance conditions have to still be satisfied; and

•  elements are subject to malus or clawback for a period, over which the Company can recover sums paid or withhold vesting.

Figures have been calculated based on target performance (fixed elements plus 70 per cent of the maximum MIP). The charts have been 
based on the same assumptions as set out for the illustrations of the application of the total remuneration opportunity under the new Policy.

Chief Executive

Finance Director

58+

  Salary 

 At risk 

£739,000

G 59+

 Pension and benefits  £110,000

£422,000

 At risk 

  Salary 

£485,000

£277,000

 Pension and benefits  £68,000

Consideration of Remuneration Policy for other employees 
The Committee takes into account pay and reward packages of the UK workforce as a whole and of other groups of employees in applying its 
Policy and determining the remuneration of the Executive Directors. Senior management participates in the MIP. The criteria for performance 
related pay under the MIP and the retention periods are the same for senior management as for the Executive Directors, with varying 
percentages of salary dependent on seniority and the strategic impact of the role. For other tiers of management and below, the Company 
operates annual and long-term incentive arrangements using criteria that may be job-specific and which also link with Company or 
individual performance. In general any salary increases for the Executive Directors will be in line with the average rise for UK employees. 

52

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
33
+
9
+
33
+
8
+
G
The Committee has not specifically canvassed the views of the Company’s employees on its Remuneration Policy, although the views of 
employees on matters that include pay and conditions generally are canvassed by means of periodic surveys, the results of which are regularly 
and openly communicated to the Board. In setting the Policy, the Company has not used any remuneration comparison measurements. 

Recruitment policy 
The remuneration of any new recruit will be determined in accordance with the same principles as for the Executive Directors, as set out 
in the Remuneration Policy table above. The Committee is mindful of the need to avoid paying more than it considers necessary to secure 
a preferred candidate of the appropriate calibre and with the experience needed for the role. In setting the remuneration for new recruits, 
the Committee will have regard to guidelines and shareholder sentiment regarding one-off or enhanced short-term or long-term incentive 
payments as well as giving consideration to the appropriateness of any performance measures associated with an award. 

The Company’s detailed policy when setting remuneration for the appointment of new Directors is summarised below:

Remuneration element

Recruitment policy

Salary, benefits and pension  These will be set in line with the policy for existing Executive Directors.

MIP 

Maximum variable 
remuneration 

Maximum participation will be set in line with the Company’s policy for existing Executive Directors and will not 
exceed 250% of salary.

The maximum variable remuneration which may be granted is 250% of salary.

“Buy out” of incentives 
forfeited on cessation 
of employment 

Where the Committee determines that the individual circumstances of recruitment justify the provision of 
a buyout, the equivalent value of any incentives that will be forfeited on cessation of an Executive Director’s 
previous employment will be calculated taking into account the following: 

•  the proportion of the performance period completed on the date of the Executive Director’s cessation 

of employment; 

•  the performance conditions attached to the vesting of these incentives and the likelihood of them 

being satisfied; and 

•  any other terms and conditions having a material effect on their value (“lapsed value”). 

The Committee may then grant up to the same value as the lapsed value, where possible, under the Company’s 
incentive plan. To the extent that it was not possible or practical to provide the buyout within the terms of the 
Company’s existing incentive plan, a bespoke arrangement would be used.

Relocation Policies 

In instances where the new Executive Director is required to relocate or spend significant time away from 
their normal residence, the Company may provide one-off compensation to reflect the cost of relocation for 
the Executive Director. The level of the relocation package will be assessed on a case-by-case basis but will 
take into consideration any cost of living differences / housing allowance and schooling.

Where an existing employee is promoted to the Board, the Policy set out above would apply from the date of promotion but there would 
be no retrospective application of the Policy in relation to subsisting incentive awards or remuneration arrangements. Accordingly, prevailing 
elements of the remuneration package for an existing employee would be honoured and form part of the ongoing remuneration of the 
person concerned. These would be disclosed to shareholders in the Remuneration Report for the relevant financial year. 

The Company’s policy when setting fees for the appointment of new Non-Executive Directors is to apply the policy which applies to current 
Non-Executive Directors. 

Service contracts and policy on termination payments 
Service contracts 
Element

Executive Directors

Non–Executive Directors

Term

Date of contract 
/appointment

Notice period in months

Company

Director

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

Andrew Allner

Janet Ashdown

Mark Edwards

Tim Pile

September 2013

October 2014

July 2003
(renewed in
July 2013 and
May 2016)

March 2015

May 2010
(renewed in
July 2013 and
May 2016)

October 2010
(renewed in
July 2013 and
May 2016)

12

(6)

12

(6)

6

(6)

6

(6)

6 

(6)

6

(6)

53

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCERemuneration Policy  – continued

Service contracts and policy on termination payments continued
Service contracts continued
In accordance with Policy, Executive Directors’ service contracts do not contain liquidated damages clauses, nor any contractual arrangements 
that would guarantee a pension with limited or no abatement on severance or early retirement, or providing for compensation for loss of 
office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid. 

Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman, are appointed under letters of appointment, usually for a term of 3 years. Either the Company 
or the Non-Executive Director may terminate the appointment before the end of the current term on 6 months’ notice. If the unexpired term 
is less than 6 months, notice does not need to be served. No compensation is payable if a Non-Executive Director is required to stand down. 

All Directors are subject to annual re-election. 

Policy on termination payments 
When considering compensation for loss of office, the Committee will always seek to minimise the cost to the Company and apply mitigation to any 
payment. Compensation for loss of office can only be paid if consistent with the Policy or otherwise with shareholder approval by Ordinary Resolution.

Remuneration element Treatment on cessation of employment

General

Salary, benefits 
and pension

MIP 
Element A

The Committee will honour Executive Directors’ contractual entitlements. If a contract is to be terminated, the 
Committee will determine such mitigation as it considers fair and reasonable in each case. Service contracts do not 
contain liquidated damages clauses. There are no contractual arrangements that would guarantee a pension with 
limited or no abatement on severance or early retirement. There is no agreement between the Company and its Directors 
or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid. The 
Committee reserves the right to make additional payments where such payments are made in good faith in discharge 
of an existing legal obligation (or by way of damages for breach of such an obligation), or by way of settlement or 
compromise of any claim arising in connection with the termination of an Executive Director’s office or employment.

These will be paid over the notice period. The Company has discretion to make a lump sum payment in lieu.

Good leaver reason (1)

Other reason

Discretion

For the year of cessation

Good leavers: 
Performance 
conditions will 
be measured at 
the normal 
measurement date. 
The Company 
bonus contribution 
will normally 
be pro-rated 
for the period 
worked during the 
financial year.

Other leavers: No 
Company bonus 
contribution 
payable for year 
of cessation.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements of discretion: 

•  to determine that an Executive is a good leaver. It is the Remuneration 

Committee’s intention to only use this discretion in circumstances where there is 
an appropriate business case which will be explained in full to shareholders; and 

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the Company bonus contribution. 

The Remuneration Committee’s normal policy is that a variable bonus 
will be pro-rated depending on the proportion of the measurement / 
vesting period in which the executive remained in employment. It is the 
Remuneration Committee’s intention to use discretion not to pro-rate in 
circumstances where there is an appropriate business case which will be 
explained in full to shareholders. 

Deferred balances in participant’s Element A plan account

Good leavers: 
The balance in 
the participant’s 
Element A Plan 
Account will 
be payable 
on cessation 
of employment. 

Other leavers: 
The balance in 
the participants’ 
Element A Plan 
Account will 
be forfeited 
on cessation 
of employment.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements of discretion: 

•  to determine that an Executive is a good leaver (subject to the principles 

set out above); 

•  to determine whether settlement of the balance of the participant’s Element 
A Plan Account should be in cash or shares or a combination of both; and

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the balance of the participant’s Element A 
Plan Account payable on cessation. A participant’s Element A Plan Account 
balance reflects prior year achievement, so, subject to any malus or clawback, 
the Remuneration Committee’s normal policy is that it will not pro-rate.  
The Remuneration Committee will determine whether to pro-rate based  
on the circumstances of the Executive’s departure.

54

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016MIP 
Element B

Good leaver reason (1)

Other reason

Discretion

For the year of cessation

Good leavers: 
Performance 
conditions will 
be measured at 
the normal 
measurement date. 
The award will 
normally be 
pro-rated for the 
period worked 
during the financial 
year and will vest 
on grant. The 
sale restrictions 
will continue to 
apply for 2 years 
post cessation.

Subsisting awards

Good leavers: 
Pro-rated to time 
and performance 
in respect of each 
subsisting award 
and subject to the 
satisfaction of the 
financial underpin 
on vesting. Sale 
restrictions will 
continue to apply 
from vesting.

Other leavers: 
No award for year 
of cessation.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements of discretion:

•  to determine that an individual is a good leaver and in accordance with 

the principles set out previously; and 

•  to determine whether to make an award or to pro-rate the award 

by reference to the period during which the Executive remained in 
employment. The Remuneration Committee’s normal policy is that it 
will pro-rate for time. It is the Remuneration Committee’s intention to 
use discretion to not pro-rate only in circumstances where there is an 
appropriate business case which will be explained in full to shareholders.

Other leavers: Lapse 
of any unvested 
awards. Vested 
awards will continue 
to be subject to the 
sale restrictions.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements of discretion: 

•  to determine that an individual is a good leaver. It is the Remuneration 
Committee’s intention to only use this discretion in circumstances 
where there is an appropriate business case which will be explained 
in full to shareholders;

•  to determine to pay cash in lieu of shares;

•  to vest the award at the end of the original deferral period or at the date 
of cessation. The Remuneration Committee will make this determination 
depending on the type of good leaver reason resulting in the cessation; and

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the maximum number of shares to the 
time from the date of grant to the date of cessation. The Remuneration 
Committee’s normal policy is that it will pro-rate awards for time. It is the 
Remuneration Committee’s intention to use discretion to not pro-rate only 
in circumstances where there is an appropriate business case which will 
be explained in full to shareholders.

It should be noted that the performance targets for subsisting awards will 
already have been satisfied at the date of grant.

There are no contractual obligations to participants in relation to the incentive schemes other than those set out above.

Other 
contractual 
obligations

(1)  A good leaver reason is defined as cessation by reason of death, ill-health, injury or disability, redundancy, retirement, the employing company ceasing to be a 

Group company, the transfer of employment to a company which is not a Group company, or otherwise at the discretion of the Committee (as described above). 
Cessation of employment in circumstances other than those set out above is cessation for other reasons.

55

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCERemuneration Policy  – continued

Change of control

Name of Incentive Plan

Impact

Discretion

Element A of the MIP

For the year of the change 
of control

Performance conditions will be measured at 
the date of the change of control. The Company 
bonus contribution will normally be pro-rated 
to the date of the change of control.

Element A of the MIP

Deferred balances in 
participant’s Element A 
Plan Account

The balance in the participant’s Element A 
Plan Account will be payable on the change 
of control.

Element B of the MIP

For the year of the change 
of control

Performance conditions will be measured at 
the date of the change of control. The award 
will normally be pro-rated to the date of the 
change of control and will vest on grant. 
The sale restrictions will not apply.

Element B of the MIP
Subsisting awards on 
a change of control

Awards will vest on a change of control subject 
to the satisfaction of the financial underpin on 
vesting. Sale restrictions will not apply.

The Remuneration Committee has the following element 
of discretion:

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the Company bonus 
contribution to time. The Remuneration Committee’s 
normal policy is that it will pro-rate for time. It is the 
Remuneration Committee’s intention to use discretion to 
not pro-rate in circumstances where there is an appropriate 
business case which will be explained in full to shareholders.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements 
of discretion:

•  to determine whether the payment of the balance of the 
participant’s Element A Plan Account should be in cash  
or shares or a combination of both; and

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the balance of the 

participant’s Element A Plan Account payable on change 
of control. The Remuneration Committee’s normal policy 
is that it will not pro-rate. The Remuneration Committee 
will determine whether to pro-rate based on the 
circumstances of change of control.

It should be noted that the deferred balances in a participant’s 
Element A Plan Account relate to bonuses earned based 
on the satisfaction of performance conditions in previous 
financial years.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements 
of discretion:

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the award to time. 

The Remuneration Committee’s normal policy is that it 
will pro-rate for time. It is the Remuneration Committee’s 
intention only to use discretion to not pro-rate in 
circumstances where there is an appropriate business case 
which will be explained in full to shareholders; and

•  to determine to pay cash in lieu of shares.

The Remuneration Committee has the following elements 
of discretion:

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the maximum number 
of shares to the time from the date of grant to the date of 
the change of control. The Remuneration Committee’s 
normal policy is that it will not pro-rate. The Remuneration 
Committee will determine whether to pro-rate based on 
the circumstances of change of control; and

•  to determine to pay cash in lieu of shares.
It should be noted that the Element B awards that are 
outstanding would have been made following satisfaction 
of performance targets for previous years.

Discretion
The Committee has discretion in several areas of policy as set out in this Report. The Committee may also exercise operational and 
administrative discretions under relevant plan rules approved by shareholders as set out in those rules. In addition, the Committee 
has the discretion to amend policy with regard to minor or administrative matters where it would be, in the opinion of the Committee, 
disproportionate to seek or await shareholder approval.

Consideration of shareholder views
The Committee regularly consults with shareholders on Executive remuneration. The Remuneration Committee gave shareholders the 
opportunity to comment on the new Policy set out in this Remuneration Committee Report before its finalisation. The Committee is 
committed to consulting in advance with shareholders before making any material changes to any element of Executive remuneration.

56

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Chairman and Non‑Executive Directors’ Remuneration Policy

Element

Fees

Purpose and how it supports the strategy

Operation

Maximum

Annual fee to attract and retain 
experienced and skilled 
Non-Executive Directors with 
the necessary experience and 
expertise to advise and assist 
with establishing and monitoring 
the strategic objectives of the 
Company. Fees reflect the time 
commitment and responsibilities 
of the roles.

The Board is responsible for setting the 
remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors. 
The Remuneration Committee is responsible 
for setting the Chairman’s fees. Non-Executive 
Directors are paid an annual fee and additional 
fees for chairmanship of committees and 
the Company retains the flexibility to pay 
fees for the membership of committees. 
The Chairman does not receive any additional 
fees for membership of committees. 

Fees are reviewed annually based on equivalent 
roles in the comparator group used to review 
salaries paid to the Executive Directors.

Non-Executive Directors and the Chairman 
do not participate in any variable 
remuneration or benefits arrangements.

The fees for Non-Executive Directors 
and the Chairman are broadly set at 
a competitive level against the 
comparator group. 

In general the level of fee increase for the 
Non-Executive Directors and the Chairman 
will be set taking account of any change 
in responsibility and salary increases for 
UK employees generally. 

The Company will pay reasonable expenses 
incurred by the Non-Executive Directors 
and Chairman in the performance of their 
duties and may settle any tax incurred 
in relation to these.

Entitlements under the current policy
Provisions of the current Policy that will continue to apply following the approval of the new Policy at the 2017 Annual General Meeting.

The following table sets out subsisting entitlements granted to Executive Directors under the current Policy where the entitlements have 
not yet vested or been paid.

The 2005 LTIP expired in 2014 and it is the intention to make no further awards under this incentive scheme following approval of the MIP. 
The Committee approved a final grant of performance shares under the 2005 LTIP in March 2014, and set EPS and OCF growth targets that 
were at the grant date closely related to the medium-term plans of the Group. The targets were met in full, and these LTIP awards will vest in 
March 2017, ensuring that there is no incentive gap before the first potential awards under Element B of the MIP are capable of vesting in 2018.

Provisions of the previous policy that will continue to apply

LTIP awards 
made in 2014 
under the 
2005 Long 
Term 
Incentive 
Plan (“LTIP”)

Grants

Operation

Performance measures and period

Performance 
Shares equal to 
100% of salary 
for Executive 
Directors.

Annual grant of 
nil-cost options 
linked to 
performance 
conditions measured 
over a 3-year period.

Performance conditions measured over 3 financial years. 

Performance measures and relative weightings are:

•  75% EPS; and

•  25% 0CF.

Vesting of 75% of the award subject to EPS performance conditions:
Performance  
(EPS growth)   
75% 
100% 
125% 

% of award  
Vesting*
0%
50%
100%

Vesting of 25% of the award subject to OCF growth
Performance  
(annual OCF growth) 
5%   
10% 
15%  

% of award  
vesting*
0%
50%
100%

* Straight line vesting between points.

Definitions and calculations

EPS is measured using International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) based 
on the audited results of the Group and subject to the discretion of the Committee 
with regard to one-off items.

OCF growth is calculated by taking the aggregated OCF for the 3 financial years 
preceding the year of grant of the award and comparing it with the aggregate 
OCF over the 3 years from the date of grant.

57

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plc 
 
 
 
 
 
Annual Remuneration Report

This report covers the reporting period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016 and explains how the Remuneration Policy 
has been implemented. Comparative figures for the 2015 financial year have also been provided.

Single total figure of remuneration in 2016 – Executive Directors (audited)

Fixed (£'000)

Performance related (£'000)

Salary

Other benefits

Salary supplement
in lieu of pension

Annual bonus

MIP Element A

MIP Element B

Long-term incentives
LTIP/MIP

Total

2016

2015

2016

2015

2016

2015

2016

2015

2016

2015

2016

2015

2016

2015

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

Total 

422

277

699

412

237

649

26

13

39

23

11

34

84

55

82

47

139

129

547

297

844

525

209

734

205

134

339

206

119

325

Note a

Note b

Note c

816

1,913

2,064

–

1,103

623

816

3,016

2,687

629

327

956

Notes d
and e

Notes:
(a)  Benefits are car / car allowance, fuel / fuel allowance, private medical insurance, life insurance and travel and accommodation expenses.

(b)  All Directors received salary supplement allowance in lieu of contributions into the Group’s pension scheme throughout the year. No Director had any entitlement 

under the defined benefit section of the pension scheme and no additional benefit was received as a result of early retirement.

(c)  The annual bonus column shows 50 per cent of the total bonus contribution earned under the MIP Element A in respect of 2016 performance, and 50 per cent of the 

total value of Element B shares awarded which are deferred but are not subject to further performance conditions (other than continued employment). The remaining 
50 per cent in respect of 2016 Element A is deferred into shares in the MIP account which are subject to performance and employment-based forfeiture for a further 
holding period. The remaining 50 per cent of 2016 Element B shares is subject to performance and employment-based forfeiture for a 3-year deferred period. These 
deferred elements will be disclosed in the LTIP column when the conditions are satisfied. The deferred shares in relation to both Element A and Element B may change 
in value during the holding period depending on the Marshalls share price.

(d)  The LTIP column shows the aggregate value of sums released from MIP or LTIP account balances from earlier years that are no longer subject to deferral and forfeiture risk 

based on performance in 2016.

(e)  The LTIP comprises the 2014 Performance Share Award under the 2005 LTIP.

Setting pay in context
The following graphs illustrate the relationship between total expenditure on remuneration and other disbursements from profit over the 
past 3 years.

The 4 elements represent the most significant outgoings for the Company during the financial year. In addition to staff pay and shareholder 
distributions, capital investment and taxation are shown for the following reasons:

• 

investment – the Company's strategy is to increase capital investment to take advantage of market demand and in order to ensure that the 
business grows in a sustainable manner with a corresponding long-term benefit for all stakeholders; and

•  tax – the Company is a UK taxpayer and feels that it is beneficial to demonstrate to all its stakeholders its total UK tax contribution. The most 

significant elements of the Company’s UK tax contribution are VAT, employer’s NI, corporation tax, fuel duty and aggregates levy. 
As profitability increases, corporation tax will also increase. In 2016 the Group was re-accredited with the Fair Tax Mark.

58

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
Relative importance of spend on pay (percentage change)

Staff pay 
(£’m)

+0.5%

76.6

79.7

80.1

Distributions to 
shareholders (£’m)

+54.9%

Capital investment 
(£’m)

-7.7%

Tax 
(£’m)

-0.1%

19.0

14.0

71.1

71.0

11.3

12.9

60.4

12.3

10.8

2014

2015

2016

2014

2015

2016

2014

2015

2016

2014

2015

2016

Total shareholder return

600

500

400

300

200

100

0
Jan 09

  Marshalls plc

  FTSE Small Cap Index

  FTSE 250

Dec 09

Dec 10

Dec 11

Dec 12

Dec 13

Dec 14

Dec 15

Dec 16

This chart shows the Group’s total shareholder return (“TSR”) performance compared to (i) the FTSE Small Cap Index and (ii) the FTSE 250. 
TSR is defined as share price growth plus reinvested dividends. Marshalls plc was a constituent of the FTSE Small Cap Index for the period from 
January 2009 to August 2015 and became a constituent of the FTSE 250 in August 2015. This chart shows the value at 31 December 2016 
of £100 invested in Marshalls plc on 1 January 2009 compared with the value of £100 invested in (i) the FTSE Small Cap Index and 
(ii) the FTSE 250. The other plotted points are the intervening financial year ends. Marshalls’ TSR performance was 42 per cent better than 
the overall performance of the FTSE Small Cap Index and 40 per cent better than the FTSE 250 in 2015.

CEO pay in the last 7 years
This table shows how pay for the CEO role has changed in the last 7 years.

Year

Single figure remuneration

% of maximum annual 
bonus earned

% of maximum LTIP 
awards vesting

2010 
(Note a)
£’000

671

2011

£’000

752

2012

£’000

938

2013
(Note b)
£’000

3,143

2014

£’000

1,101

2015

£’000

2,064

2016

£’000

1,913

38.6%

78.1%

33.0%

63.6%

99.3%

100%

96.9%

0

0

0

63.0%

0

100%

100%

Notes:
(a) The years up to 2013 show the previous CEO’s (Graham Holden’s) remuneration.

(b)  The 2013 single figure is made up of the previous CEO’s base salary and benefits up to 10 October 2013 and Martyn Coffey’s proportionate entitlement to salary, 
benefits and annual bonus for his period of service in 2013. It also includes the various incentive payments that crystallised as a result of Graham Holden being 
a “good leaver” by reason of retirement in 2013 (see 2013 Remuneration Report for full details).

59

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
Annual Remuneration Report  – continued

Percentage change in CEO’s remuneration
The table below shows how the percentage change in the CEO’s salary, benefits and bonus between 2015 and 2016 compares with 
the percentage change in the average of each of those components of pay for the UK-based employees of the Group as a whole.

Salary
£’000

2016

422

2015

412

78,450

76,927

2,252

34.8

2,236

34.4

Percentage
change
(Note a)

%

2.5

2.0

0.7

1.3

Taxable benefits
£’000

Percentage
change

Bonus (Note b)
£’000

Percentage
increase

2016

26

2015

23

2,337

2,244

361

6.5

382

5.9

%

13.0

4.1

(5.5)

10.2

2016

752

4,207

432

9.7

2015

731

4,111

385

10.1

 %

3.4

2.3

12.2

(8.8)

CEO pay

UK total pay

Number of employees

Average per employee

Notes:
(a)  Martyn Coffey’s salary was increased on 1 January 2016 by 2.5 per cent, the same percentage increase as given to the workforce as a whole.

(b) The bonus is the non-deferred amount earned for the relevant year taken from the total remuneration table.

(c)  A 2.5 per cent increase was awarded to the workforce on 1 January 2016. The table above shows, however, that the average salary per employee for 2016 saw an increase 
of 1.3 per cent compared with the comparative for 2015. This is due to reduced levels of overtime in the current year and specific variations relating to the impact and 
timing of leavers and new starters.

(d)  The table above shows that the average bonus per employee decreased by 8.8 per cent in 2016 compared with the prior year. This is due to a significant increase in the 
number of employees eligible for bonus schemes at lower salary grades in the current year and because sales bonus targets were not met in full in 2016, when they had 
been in 2015.

Outcomes of incentive schemes in 2016 (audited)
This section explains how 2016 performance is reflected in rewards earned under the Company’s incentive schemes.

Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”)
The MIP incorporates:

•  Element A, an annual bonus award carrying a maximum of 150 per cent of salary, of which 50 per cent must be deferred into shares 

or share-linked units; and

•  Element B, an award normally in the form of a nil-cost option to acquire shares, carrying a maximum of 100 per cent of salary, conditional 
on continued employment for 3 years from grant and 50 per cent of which is also subject to a financial condition over the 3-year period. 
Element B shares must be held for a further 2 years after vesting.

Both awards depend on achievement of the performance conditions set by the Committee at the date of award. The table below shows 
the 2016 performance conditions and the extent to which they have been satisfied.

Measurement

EPS

Operating cash flow 
(before restructuring costs)

Percentage
of maximum
contribution based
on measurement

75%

25%

Minimum
target

Maximum
target

2016
actual

Percentage
of target
achieved

Percentage
of salary
earned
(Element A)

Percentage
of salary
earned
(Element B)

16.47p

18.94p

18.95p

100%

112.5%

75.0%

£47.2m

£61.5m

£57.9m

87.85%

32.9%

22.0%

Non-financial targets

20% deduction 
if not met

95% (customer service)
To match or improve on 2015 
performance (health and safety)

Both
achieved

N/A

No
deduction

No
deduction 

100%

Performance conditions were set at the beginning of 2016 and the Committee took account of both internal budgets and external factors 
such as the market consensus of investors for the full year 2016. During the year, cash flow from sales improved significantly and pre-tax profit 
grew by 30 per cent. This performance meant that the stretching EPS target was met in full and the operating cash flow target set at the 
beginning of the year was 87.85 per cent achieved. This resulted in a combined 96.96 per cent achievement against target. The share price fell 
by 10 per cent during the year (31 December 2015: 325 pence; 31 December 2016: 292.5 pence), which means the underlying value of share and 
share-linked awards from previous years decreased.

EPS
EPS relates to our strategic objective to grow profits. The Group’s profit before tax increased by 30 per cent from £35.3 million to £46.0 million. 
EPS improved by 32 per cent from 14.32 pence in 2015 to 18.95 pence in 2016. EPS is measured using International Financial Reporting 
Standards (“IFRSs”) based on the audited results of the Group and subject to the discretion of the Committee with regard to one-off items.

Operating cash flow
Operating cash flow is relevant for measurement of cash flow and overall sustainability. The Group’s operating cash flow for the year ended 
31 December 2016 was close to the higher end of the target range set by the Committee at the beginning of the year.

60

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Additional performance conditions
Our customers are at the heart of our business model, and our measurement of customer service uses factors such as product availability, 
on-time delivery performance and administrative and delivery accuracy to assess performance. The Group’s average customer service 
performance, assessed monthly, exceeded its minimum target of 95 per cent throughout 2016. The Group also continued its excellent 
performance against its stated objective of keeping days lost to accidents to a minimum, by reference to the 2015 rate. Days lost to accidents 
year on year actually reduced by a further 20 per cent. Had these 2 targets not been met, the overall level of MIP award would have reduced 
by 20 per cent; the achievement of these measures means that no reduction factor will apply.

MIP awards 2016
Element A
Plan accounts

Opening balance (number of shares) (Note a)

2016 contribution (% of salary earned)

Value

2016 element released (Note b)

Closing balance (deferred into shares)

Number of shares represented by closing balance (Note c)

Element B

Number of shares awarded

Percentage of salary 

Value

EPS forfeiture threshold (Note d)

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

161,900

145.4%

£613,613

£(547,431)

£547,431

190,344

64,361

145.4%

£402,516

£(296,915)

£296,915

103,238

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

142,237

96.9%

£409,075

10.13p

93,304

96.9%

£268,344

10.13p

Notes:
(a)  50 per cent of the earned Element A award is released to the participant as annual bonus; the remaining 50 per cent is deferred into the participant’s MIP account and converted 

into shares. The previously deferred proportion of the 2015 Element A award was converted into shares by reference to the mid-market average value for the 30-day period ending 
on 31 December 2015. Dividends paid during the year are also added to the carried-forward plan account. The chart above shows the resulting opening balance value calculated 
by reference to the mid-market average value for the 30-day period ended 31 December 2016 and adding the value of dividends of 9.65 pence per share paid during 2016.

(b)  2016 is year 3 of the 4-year MIP. The earned Element A award for 2016 is added to the individual’s plan account, and 50 per cent of the resulting balance is released 
to the participant as an annual bonus; the remaining 50 per cent is deferred into the participant’s MIP account and converted into shares. The deferral is repeated 
in each subsequent year up to the final year, in which, subject to any forfeiture provisions, 100 per cent of any balance in the MIP account is released.

(c) The carried-forward balance is converted back into shares by reference to the mid-market average value for the 30-day period ended 31 December 2016 (287.6 pence).

(d)  If the actual EPS falls below the forfeiture threshold over the 3 years before vesting, 50 per cent of the balance of the award is forfeited. Once Element B shares have 

vested, they must normally be held for a further 2 years. Element B shares lapse on cessation of employment except in “good leaver” circumstances, in which case they 
vest on leaving and must be held for 2 years from the date of leaving.

2005 LTIP award: 2014 performance share awards
The vesting of performance shares granted in 2014 under the 2005 LTIP is dependent on achievement of EPS and OCF growth targets over 
the 2014, 2015 and 2016 financial years. The expected outcome is shown in the table below.

Executive Director

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

Number of performance
shares awarded 2014

2014 target EPS (75%) 
and OCF (25%) growth

Actual 2014 awards

Level of vesting of 2014 award

222,124

115,676

EPS growth (75% to 125%)

EPS growth = 237.2%

EPS = 100% 

OCF growth (5% to 15%)

OCF growth = 112.7%

OCF = 100% 

No further awards are outstanding under the 2005 LTIP, which has now expired.

61

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEAnnual Remuneration Report  – continued

Single total figure of remuneration: Non‑Executive Directors (audited)
Non-Executive Directors do not participate in any of the Company’s incentive arrangements. Their fees are reviewed periodically and were last 
reviewed in October 2016. The Chairman’s fees are set by the Committee and the Chief Executive; other Non-Executive Directors’ fees are set 
by the Board as a whole. The Non-Executive Directors also received travel and accommodation expenses associated with attendance at Board 
meetings, and where this is a taxable benefit it is shown below as a grossed-up taxable amount.

Committee fees
£’000

Expenses
£’000

2016

2015

2016

2015

Andrew Allner
Chairman and Chairman 
of Nomination Committee

Janet Ashdown
Senior Independent Director, 
Chairman of Remuneration 
Committee and member of Audit 
and Nomination Committees

Mark Edwards
Chairman of Audit Committee 
and member of Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees

Tim Pile
Member of Audit, Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees

Alan Coppin
(retired 18 May 2016)

Total

Board fee
£’000

2016

141

2015

137

45

33

45

43

44

17

43

44

–

4

6

–

3

–

–

6

–

6

Total
£’000

2016

142

2015

138

50

34

52

50

45

21

310

44

51

317

1

1

1

1

1

5

1

1

1

1

1

5

292

300

13

12

The fees were increased by 2 per cent from 1 January 2017 in line with other Group employees. Janet Ashdown became Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee in May 2016 on the retirement of Alan Coppin.

The Non-Executive Directors reclaim travel and expenses incurred in the performance of their duties.

Statement of implementation of Remuneration Policy in the following financial year (2017)
Executive Directors
Salary
The Committee approved a 2 per cent salary increase for Executive Directors effective from 1 January 2017, in line with inflation and increases 
for UK employees generally.

Director

Martyn Coffey 

Jack Clarke

Benefits and pension
Benefits continue on the same basis as in 2016.

1 January 2017
£’000

1 January 2016
£’000

430

283

422

277

Change 
%

2.0

2.0

62

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Statement of implementation of Remuneration Policy in the following financial year (2017) continued
Variable pay / incentives
Executive Directors will be granted performance awards under the MIP conditional upon achieving certain performance conditions in 2017. 
The Committee has discretion under the Remuneration Policy to change the weightings of performance criteria to align with its priorities, 
including measures relating to performance on ESG issues. Our strategic priorities for 2017 are focused on improving profit margins, growing 
our business and developing our brand, while also remaining innovative and operating sustainably with the highest standards of health, 
safety and social responsibility. The Committee believes that EPS and the ratio of OCF to EBITDA are the most appropriate criteria for 
measuring achievement of our financial objectives and that a combination of financial and non-financial criteria avoids inadvertently 
motivating irresponsible behaviour. The weighting for the operation of 2017 awards under the MIP will be:

EPS  

OCF to EBITDA  

75%

25%

Targets are set between a minimum (0 per cent) and maximum (100 per cent) range in each case, with on-target (budget) performance 
expected to deliver 70 per cent of maximum.

Additional non-financial performance conditions to reflect our focus on brand, customers and employees will apply:

•  customer service (must remain at or above 95 per cent); and

•  health and safety incidence: the rate of accidents must not fall below an agreed threshold, benchmarked by reference to the “base” year (2015).

If they are not met, there is a reduction of award value earned by 10 per cent in relation to each of these additional conditions.

Element A awards have a forfeiture threshold set annually at the time of confirmation of the award. If this is breached, 50 per cent of the 
deferred balance in a participant’s Element A MIP account is forfeited.

Element B awards also have a long-term financial underpin based on a minimum EPS threshold that must be maintained over the 3 years from 
the date of grant. If this is breached, 50 per cent of the Element B award is forfeited. Element B awards are granted after the end of the financial 
period by reference to which they have been earned and the underpin is set at the time of grant.

The measurement period under the MIP by reference to which these targets must be met will be the full financial year ending 31 December 2017. 
It is the view of the Committee that the targets for the MIP are commercially sensitive as they are primarily related to budgeted future profit and 
debt levels in the Company and therefore their disclosure in advance is not in the interests of the Company or shareholders. The Committee will, 
however, provide full retrospective disclosure to enable shareholders to judge the level of award against the targets set.

Non‑Executive Directors
The Board approved an increase in the fees of 2 per cent from 1 January 2017, in line with Executive Directors and UK employees. Non-Executive 
Directors reclaim business expenses incurred in the performance of their duties retrospectively against duly presented invoices.

Director

Andrew Allner (Chairman)

Janet Ashdown (SID)

Mark Edwards

Tim Pile

1 January 2017
£’000

1 January 2016
£’000

Percentage
increase

143.3

52.7

51.6

44.7

140.5

43.8

50.6

43.8

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

63

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
Annual Remuneration Report  – continued

Shareholdings of Directors (audited)
In order that their interests are aligned with those of shareholders, Executive Directors are expected to build up and maintain a meaningful 
shareholding in the Company. There are no minimum holding requirements for Non-Executive Directors, but they would usually be expected 
to hold some shares in the Company.

The minimum shareholding requirements for Executive Directors are as follows:
Executive Director

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

Percentage of salary

200%

200%*

*  Increased in 2017 from 100 per cent. The minimum shareholding should be reached within 5 years of appointment. Where the minimum percentage is increased, 

following appointment, the timescale for achieving the increase is 5 years from the year of increase.

Directors’ shareholdings and share interests
The following table sets out, in respect of each of the Directors:

•  the number of shares the Director holds unconditionally;

•  the number of deferred and conditional shares held under the incentive schemes that will vest following the 2016 results; and

•  the number of shares subject to unvested incentive awards.

Shareholding requirement

Number
of shares
required
 (Note a)

% of
 salary

200

200

288,472

189,231

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Director

Executive

Martyn Coffey

Jack Clarke

Non‑Executive

Andrew Allner

Janet Ashdown

Mark Edwards

Tim Pile

Beneficially
owned

Shares that may vest
following 2016 results
 (Note b)

Deferred shares
(Note c)

Deferred and 
contingent
share interests
(Note d)

Total interests
in shares (including
contingent interests)

Number of
shares

Number of
shares

Number of
shares

Number of
shares

Number of
shares

170,034

5,670

57,246

11,210

98,000

44,740

222,124

115,676

211,765

127,524

403,488

231,311

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,007,411

480,181

57,246

11,210

98,000

44,740

Notes:
(a) The closing price on 31 December 2016 of 292.5 pence per share has been used to measure the number of shares required.

(b)  The 2005 LTIP performance shares awarded in 2014 represent 100 per cent of the award.

(c)  This column includes the 50 per cent proportion of share interests awarded in 2014, 2015 and 2016 under Element B of the MIP in the form of nil-cost options or 

conditional shares that may be exercised after the 3-year deferral period but where vesting is only dependent on continuing employment throughout the 3-year 
deferral period with no other performance conditions.

(d)  This column comprises share interests awarded under the MIP (Element A deferred shares and Element B deferred shares) that remain subject to a financial performance 
conditions as well as to continued employment over the relevant deferral period. 50 per cent of Element A awards and 100 per cent of Element B awards shown in this 
column may be forfeited if the financial condition is not satisfied.

(e)  Share interests under Element A and Element B of the MIP are calculated by reference to the mid-market average value for the 30-day period ended 31 December 2016 (287.6 pence).

(f)  The table above includes the interests of “persons closely associated” as defined under the Financial Services and Markets Act (Market Abuse) Regulations 2016.

64

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
Service contracts and policy on termination payments
Each Executive Director has a service contract with the Company which is terminable by the Company on not more than 12 months’ notice 
and by the Director on 6 months’ notice. Directors’ service contracts do not contain liquidated damages clauses. There are no contractual 
arrangements that would guarantee a pension with limited or no abatement on severance or early retirement. There is no agreement 
between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs because 
of a takeover bid.

Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman, are appointed under letters of appointment, usually for a term of 3 years. Either the 
Company or the Non-Executive Director may terminate the appointment before the end of the current term on 6 months’ notice. If the 
unexpired term is less than 6 months, notice does not need to be served. All Non-Executive Directors are subject to annual re-election. 
No compensation is payable if a Non-Executive Director is required to stand down.

Copies of Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office on application 
to the Company Secretary and will also be on display at the Company’s Annual General Meeting.

The Committee and its advisers
Role of the Remuneration Committee
The Committee’s responsibilities include:

•  setting remuneration policy for Executive Directors;

•  determining specific remuneration packages for Executive Directors and for the Chairman;

•  operating the Company’s employee share incentive arrangements;

•  providing guidance on remuneration for senior employees who report to the CEO; and

•  considering the broader remuneration policies for Group employees below Board level.

The Board determines the remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors. No Director plays a part in any decision about his own remuneration. 
Janet Ashdown, Mark Edwards and Tim Pile are all Independent Non-Executive Directors within the definition of the Code, and Andrew Allner 
satisfied the independence condition on his appointment as Non-Executive Chairman in 2010. None of them have any personal financial 
interest (other than as shareholders) in matters to be decided, nor do they have any conflicts of interest from cross-directorships or any 
day-to-day involvement in running the business.

External advisers
The Company has re-appointed external remuneration advisers, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”). PwC attends meetings of the 
Committee by invitation. The Chief Executive attends as appropriate but may not participate in discussions about his own remuneration. 
The Company Secretary acts as secretary to the Committee and attends Committee meetings.

PwC’s fees are agreed by the Remuneration Committee according to the work performed. The terms of its engagement are available on 
request from the Company Secretary. PwC also provided advice to the Company during the year in relation to corporate tax and pension 
matters. The Committee is satisfied that the advice from PwC is independent based on the separation of the team advising the Committee 
from any other work undertaken by PwC and the fact that PwC is a signatory to the Remuneration Consultants’ Group’s Code of Conduct. 
PwC’s work relating to Executive remuneration during 2016 included assistance in the preparation of the 2016 Remuneration Committee 
Report, benchmarking of total remuneration in respect of the Company and its comparator group, and general advice on remuneration 
trends, regulations and best practice. The amount paid to PwC in respect of remuneration advice received during 2016 was £25,000.

65

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEAudit Committee Report

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present the Audit Committee Report for 2016. 
It sets out the Audit Committee’s objectives and responsibilities 
and also explains the activities undertaken during the year and the 
priorities for 2017. This report, which is part of the Directors’ Report, 
explains how the Audit Committee has discharged its responsibilities 
during 2016.

The role of the Audit Committee is to oversee financial reporting and 
to review the ongoing effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls. 
The Committee provides assurance on the Group’s risk management 
processes and assesses information received from the external and 
internal audit functions. This report explains the Group’s procedures in 
relation to internal control, risk management and financial reporting.

KPMG LLP, who were appointed to carry out the internal audit in 2015, 
conducted 8 separate detailed reviews during 2016 and reported to 
the Committee with recommendations, all of which have been 
implemented or will be implemented during 2017. One of our key 
priorities remains to monitor the risk management and control 
environment, ensuring that it aligns with best practice and that 
any improvements are implemented in a timely and efficient way. 
Cyber security remained a key priority during 2016. Other areas 
of focus and further details in relation to the Committee’s activities 
during the year are provided in this report.

The Committee has reviewed the Group’s Financial Statements 
contained in this Annual Report and, following its review, is satisfied 
that the Committee has provided assurance to the Board that they 
present a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of the 
Group’s position and prospects.

Mark Edwards
Chair of the Audit Committee

66

HIGHLIGHTS OF 2016
•  The Committee reviewed the significant financial judgements 

made during the year and in the preparation of the 2016 Financial 
Statements. The significant areas considered by the Committee 
in 2016 were inventory provisioning, revenue and rebate recognition 
and the potential for management override of controls. 

•  The Committee provided assurance to the Board on whether the 
2016 Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, 
are fair, balanced and understandable. 

•  A review of cyber security controls was undertaken by KPMG LLP as 
part of a wider Cyber Security Review. A number of recommendations 
have been, or are in the process of being, addressed.

•  During the year the Committee commissioned KPMG LLP to 

review the delegation of powers to operational management and 
the appropriateness of authorisation limits across all functional 
areas. The Committee is satisfied that robust controls are in place 
that cover delegation of authority procedures across the Group.

•  During the year a high level review of strategic risk was undertaken 
by the Committee which was subsequently integrated into the 
overall Risk Register.

OUR FUTURE TARGETS
•  Continue to oversee the significant financial judgements made 

by management.

•  Continue to assess the effectiveness of risk management systems 

and internal control processes.

•  Continue to review the delivery of the external and internal audit 

and monitor progress.

•  Continue to assess and improve cyber security controls and 
to ensure that IT controls remain appropriate and robust. 

•  Continue to review the findings from internal audit reviews 

undertaken by KPMG LLP and monitor the implementation of 
recommendations made in these reports and the status of progress 
made against previously agreed actions. There are 8 individual internal 
audit reviews planned for 2017 and these include:

•  a further cyber security audit;

•  ongoing cyclical reviews of key financial processes, including 

the payments cycle;

•  a supply chain review, including supplier selection and third 

party contract management; and

•  a review of the Group’s budget process.

•  Continue to monitor changes in external regulatory environment 

and best practice.

AUDIT COMMITTEE MEMBERS
 • Mark Edwards – Chair

 • Janet Ashdown

 • Tim Pile

Committee Terms of Reference 
www.marshalls.co.uk/documents

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Effectiveness of the Audit Committee
During the year an external evaluation of the Committee’s 
performance was undertaken as part of the Board evaluation 
conducted by Equity Communications, an independent external 
evaluator. The review found the Committee to be effective and 
well run. No areas of concern were highlighted during this review. 

The Chairman of the Committee is a Chartered Accountant and the 
Board is satisfied he is independent and has recent and relevant 
financial experience as required by the Code. Other members also 
have relevant sectoral and financial experience. Their biographical 
details are on pages 34 and 35, and attendance at meetings is shown 
on page 40. 

Financial reporting
The Committee has reviewed, with both management and the 
external auditor, where the more significant judgements have been 
made and the quality and appropriateness of the Group’s accounting 
policies. The Committee has also reviewed the assumptions and 
provided assurance to support the long-term viability statement.

The Group’s 2015 Annual Report and Accounts were reviewed by the 
FRC’s Conduct Committee under Part 2 of its Operations Procedures. 
Those matters that were drawn to the Board’s attention through this 
review have been addressed in this year’s Annual Report and Accounts. 
The FRC review gives no assurance as to the accuracy of the accounts 
and may not be relied on. The FRC has no liability to any third party.

Role and responsibilities
The key responsibilities of the Committee are:

•  to keep under review the Group’s financial and other systems 

and controls and financial reporting procedures;

•  to plan and scope the annual audit and half-yearly audit 

review, receive audit reports and review financial statements, 
taking account of accounting policies adopted and applicable 
reporting requirements;

•  to review the Annual Report and Financial Statements and 
advise the Board on whether they give a fair, balanced and 
understandable explanation of the Company’s business and 
performance over the relevant period;

•  to conduct a detailed review of internal controls and the internal 

audit process and report findings at least twice yearly to the Board;

•  to review and update the Company’s Risk Register;

•  to review external auditor independence and audit and non-audit 
fees, to review and monitor the appropriateness of the provision 
of non-audit services by the auditor, and make recommendations 
regarding audit tender and the appointment and remuneration 
of the auditor; and

•  to review the Anti-Bribery Code and procedures, the Serious 

Concerns Policy and other policies relevant to financial security, 
compliance and business ethics.

The Audit Committee is the body appointed by the Board with 
responsibility for carrying out the functions required by the Listing 
Rules DTR 7.1.3R. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are reviewed 
annually and approved by the Board.

How the Audit Committee operates
During the year, the Audit Committee held 4 formal meetings and 
there were also meetings between the Audit Committee Chairman, 
the Finance Director and the external auditor. 

The Committee meets both the external and internal auditor 
independently of management, giving the opportunity to ensure 
that it has full visibility of matters that have been the subject of 
particular discussions. The Committee also reports to the Board in 
relation to the going concern statement and the viability statement 
and whether the accounts are fair, balanced and understandable.

67

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEAudit Committee Report – continued

Significant issues related to the Financial Statements
When reviewing the annual and half-yearly results, the Committee 
exercises its judgement in relation to matters drawn to its attention 
by the Finance Director from the internal audit function, the Risk 
Committee and the Group’s external auditor. The significant areas 
considered by the Committee for 2016 were:

•  Revenue and rebate recognition – management’s assessment 

of the appropriate level of accruals to recognise for rebates due to 
customers at the year-end. The Committee discussed the policy 
on rebate recognition with operational management. The external 
auditor presented its findings with regard to the audit testing 
in this area to the Committee. The Committee is satisfied with 
the controls and procedures that support the timeliness and 
completeness of recognition of rebates due to customers.

•  The risk of management override of controls – management’s 
assessment of the control framework including authorisation 
controls and segregation of duties. The Committee considered 
those areas where management applies judgement in 
determining the appropriate accounting and discussed this with 
the external auditor. The external auditor presented its findings 
with regard to the audit testing of journals to the Committee. 
This testing included the use of data analytics to profile the 
entire journal population.

•  Inventory provisioning – management’s assessment of the 

appropriate level of provisioning against inventory obsolescence. 
The gross levels of finished goods inventory held and the provisions 
recorded against obsolescence and in respect of items that might be 
sold at lower than cost were reviewed by the Committee. The review 
included meetings with operational management to discuss the 
inventory provisioning strategy. The external auditor presented its 
findings with regard to the audit testing over inventory valuation 
and the Committee concurred with management’s assessment 
of the carrying value of Group inventories. 

Fair, balanced and understandable
The Committee has considered whether, in its opinion, the 2016 
Annual Report and Financial Statements is, taken as a whole, fair, 
balanced and understandable, and whether it provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position, performance, 
business model and strategy. In making this assessment, the Committee 
has advised the Board in relation to the statement required by the 
UK Corporate Governance Code.

The Committee has concluded that the disclosures, and the 
process and controls underlying their production, were appropriate 
to enable it to determine that the 2016 Annual Report and Financial 
Statements are fair, balanced and understandable.

Risk management and internal control
The Board is responsible for reviewing the effectiveness of the 
system of risk management and control, and for ensuring that it 
meets the necessary standards. The systems and controls are also 
subject to a regular rolling programme of review, the results of which 
are periodically reported to the Board. 

The Group’s Risk Committee, comprising the Executive Directors and 
members of senior management with Executive accountability for 
particular risk areas, meets at least twice yearly to identify, evaluate 
and consider steps to manage any material risks which might 
threaten the Group’s business objectives. 

68

The Group has an established internal control framework, the 
key features of which include clearly defined reporting lines and 
authorisation procedures and a comprehensive budget and monthly 
reporting system. The internal control framework governs the internal 
financial reporting process of the business, with checks and balances 
built into the system that are designed to reduce the likelihood of 
material error or fraud. 

The Audit Committee has carried out an assessment of the 
effectiveness of the Group’s risk management and internal control 
system, covering all material controls including its financial, operational 
and compliance controls and risk management systems for the year 
to 31 December 2016.

The Group maintains a written Risk Register that identifies the 
Group’s key risk areas, the probability of these risks occurring and the 
impact they would have on the Group. Against each risk, the effectiveness 
of the controls that exist to manage and, where possible, minimise or 
eliminate those risks are also listed. The Risk Register process identifies 
areas for action and independent audit assessment in order to test the 
effectiveness of the Group’s risk control systems. Information relating 
to the management of risks and any changes to the assessment of key 
risks is regularly reported to the Board, and the Risk Register is updated 
to reflect changes. To the extent that any failings or weaknesses are 
identified during the review process, appropriate measures are 
taken to remedy these. The key risks affecting the Group, how they 
relate to strategy and how they changed during the year, together 
with a description of the controls and mitigation associated with 
such risks, are highlighted in the Strategic Review on pages 20 to 24.

External audit, auditor independence and objectivity
The Audit Committee has primary responsibility for making a 
recommendation to the Board on the appointment, re-appointment 
and removal of the external auditor. It keeps under review the scope 
and results of the audit, its cost effectiveness and the independence 
and objectivity of the auditor. The Group’s current auditor, Deloitte LLP, 
has processes in place designed to maintain independence, including 
regular rotation of the audit partner. Deloitte LLP was appointed 
in May 2015 as statutory auditor following a tender process, 
Christopher Robertson has acted as audit partner since the 
appointment of Deloitte LLP as auditor in May 2015. The Company 
has complied with the Competition and Markets Authority’s Order 
for the financial year under review. 

The Committee has adopted policies to safeguard the independence 
of its external auditor. It is the policy of the Company that the 
external auditor should not provide non-audit services other than 
those of a “de minimis” value of less than £5,000 in aggregate in 
any financial year. Any other non-audit services, require the specific 
approval of the Committee. Where the Committee perceives that the 
independence of the auditor could be compromised, the work will not 
be awarded to the external auditor. Details of amounts paid to the 
external auditor for audit and non-audit services in 2016 are analysed 
in Note 3 on page 94. Other than the auditor’s Half-yearly review of 
Marshalls plc, no amounts were paid for non-audit work. The aggregate 
amount paid to other firms of accountants for non-audit services 
in the same period was £245,000 (2015: £172,000).

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Whistleblowing and bribery
The Audit Committee monitors any reported incidents under 
the Serious Concerns Policy (our whistleblowing policy), which 
is available to all employees. This policy is displayed on operating 
site noticeboards and on the Company’s intranet, and sets out the 
procedure for employees to raise legitimate concerns about any 
wrongdoing without fear of criticism, discrimination or reprisal. 
The Serious Concerns Policy was reviewed during the year and the 
Committee was satisfied that arrangements are in place for the 
proportionate and independent investigation of such matters 
and for appropriate follow-up action.

The Audit Committee also takes responsibility for reviewing the 
policies and procedures adopted by the Company to prevent bribery. 
The Company is committed to a zero-tolerance position with regard 
to bribery, made explicit through its Anti-Bribery Code and 
supporting guidance for its employees, agents and contractors on 
hospitality and gifts. The policy and procedures are published on the 
Company website and displayed on operating site noticeboards. 
Online training is available to all employees via the Group’s internal 
learning zone to reinforce the Anti-Bribery Code and procedures, and 
classroom-based training sessions are also held throughout the year. 
All employees in decision-making roles with potential exposure to 
bribery risk have completed the training and must self-certify 
annually that they continue to comply. There is a maintained register 
of employee interests and a gifts and hospitality record. The internal 
audit review programme included a review of the adequacy of the 
Company’s procedures in relation to the prevention of bribery, 
and recommendations from the internal audit process have 
been implemented. 

The Audit Committee Report has been approved by the Board and 
signed on its behalf by:

Mark Edwards
Chair of the Audit Committee
15 March 2017

Effectiveness of the external audit
An annual review of external audit effectiveness was undertaken 
by the Committee in 2016. The conclusion of the review was that 
the external auditor had conducted a comprehensive, appropriate 
and effective audit. Communication, at all levels, had been open and 
constructive and areas where the external auditor could work more 
effectively, in respect of each phase of the audit, were identified. 

Internal audit
The Committee has responsibility for monitoring the effectiveness of 
internal controls and reviews these on an ongoing basis. The internal 
audit process of reviewing and reporting on the internal control 
system is carried out by KPMG LLP, appointed by the Committee in 
2015 to act as internal auditor for the Group. The annual internal audit 
programme is derived from a risk-based assessment that takes into 
account the Risk Register and management input. This risk-based 
assessment is reviewed and approved by the Audit Committee. This 
process is overseen by the Finance Director. KPMG LLP are independent 
from the Company’s external auditor and have no other connection 
with the Group.

The Company operates a self-certification internal control process 
to support the internal audit process throughout the year. The internal 
audit programme includes both regular audit checks and assignments 
to look at areas of critical importance. These assignments form part of 
a much wider programme of independently audited aspects of the 
Group’s operations. Any areas of weakness that are identified through 
this process prompt a detailed action plan and a follow-up audit 
check to establish that actions have been completed. Instances of 
fraud or attempted fraud (if any) and preventative action plans are 
also reported to the Committee and recorded in a fraud register.

During the year, in addition to the regular internal control process, 
KMPG LLP conducted specific reviews on cyber security risk and the 
controls over delegated authority, as well as updating earlier reports 
on Bribery Act compliance, business resilience planning and other 
IT-related risks.

The Committee is pleased to report that, although the wider 
risk of cyber fraud continues to increase, no significant failings or 
weaknesses were identified during the year. There was only one 
incidence of fraud affecting the Group’s business identified during 
2016. This was an externally instigated fraud and no material losses 
were incurred.

Effectiveness of the internal audit
An annual review of internal audit effectiveness and of the 
performance of KPMG LLP as independent internal auditor was 
undertaken by the Committee in 2016.

The conclusion was very positive and was that the current internal 
audit process continues to be an efficient and effective means of 
managing the internal audit function. The Committee has 
considered, with KPMG LLP, how this process can be developed 
further during 2017 and further improvements have been reflected 
in the current year plan.

69

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEDirectors’ Report – Other Regulatory Information

The information required by the Listing Rules (DTR 4.1.8R) is 
contained in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report. 
Marshalls plc is registered with company number 5100353.

The Directors of the Company are listed on pages 34 and 35. 

Political donations: The Group made no donations during 
the year to any political party or political organisation or to any 
independent election candidate, whether in the European Union 
or elsewhere (2015: £nil).

Risk management: The Group’s risk management objectives, 
its approach to managing risk generally and its use of financial 
instruments are described in the Strategic Report on pages 20 to 24. 
Further details of the Group’s risk management in relation to financial 
risks and its use of financial instruments to mitigate such risks are set 
out in Note 17 on pages 102 to 107.

Greenhouse gas emissions: The Group’s CO2 (greenhouse gas) 
emissions in 2016 are disclosed in the Strategic Report on page 27.

Employees: The Company’s policies in relation to disabled 
employees and employee involvement and communication are 
explained in the Strategic Report on page 26.

Corporate governance: Details of how the Group complies with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code are set out on pages 36 to 41.

Post‑balance sheet events of importance since 
31 December 2016: There have been no important events affecting 
the Group since the end of the financial year.

Research and development: Activity and likely future 
developments for the business are described in the Strategic Report 
on pages 2 to 33.

Dividends
The Board is recommending a final dividend of 5.80 pence 
(2015: 4.75 pence) per share which, together with the interim 
dividend of 2.90 pence (2015: 2.25 pence) per share, makes a 
combined dividend of 8.70 pence (2015: 7.00 pence) per share. The 
Board is also recommending payment of a supplementary dividend 
of 3.00 pence per share, which is discretionary and non-recurring. 
Payment of the final dividend and the supplementary dividend, if 
approved at the Annual General Meeting, will be made on 30 June 2017 
to shareholders registered at the close of business on 16 June 2017. 
The ex-dividend date will be 15 June 2017.

The dividend paid in the year to 31 December 2016 and 
disclosed in the Consolidated Income Statement is 9.65 pence 
(2015: 6.25 pence) per share, being the previous year’s final dividend 
of 4.75 pence (2015: 4.00 pence) per share, the interim dividend of 
2.90 pence (2015: 2.25 pence) per share in respect of the year ended 
31 December 2016 and the prior year supplementary dividend of 
2.00 pence per share. The 2015 final and supplementary dividends 
were paid on 8 July 2016 and the 2016 interim dividend was paid on 
2 December 2016. 

Share capital and authority to purchase shares
The Company’s share capital at 1 January 2017 was 199,378,755 
Ordinary Shares of 25 pence. There has been no change between 
31 December 2016 and 15 March 2017. Details of the share capital 
are set out in Note 20 on page 116. 

The Ordinary Shares of the Company carry equal rights to dividends, 
voting and return of capital on the winding up of the Company, 
as set out in the Company’s Articles of Association. There are no 
restrictions on the transfer of securities in the Company and there 
are no restrictions on any voting rights or deadlines, other than those 
prescribed by law, nor is the Company aware of any arrangement 
between holders of its shares which may result in restrictions on the 
transfer of securities or voting rights, nor any arrangement whereby 
a shareholder has waived or agreed to waive dividends (other than 
the EBT – see below).

The Marshalls plc Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”) holds shares 
for the purposes of satisfying future awards that may vest under the 
Company’s share-based incentive schemes. The EBT may purchase 
shares in the Company from time to time to satisfy awards granted 
to Directors and Senior Executives subject to the achievement of 
performance targets under the Company’s incentive schemes. 
At 31 December 2016 the EBT held 2,127,022 Ordinary Shares in the 
Company (2015: 2,715,747 shares) in respect of future incentive 
awards under the Company’s employee share schemes. Details 
of outstanding awards are set out in Note 18 on pages 111 to 114. 
The EBT has waived its right to receive dividends on shares that it 
holds beneficially in respect of future awards. The Trustee of the 
EBT exercises any voting rights on such shares in accordance with 
the Directors’ recommendations.

UK-based employees of the Group with more than 6 months’ 
service may participate in the Marshalls plc Share Purchase Plan 
during any offer period. Employees purchase Ordinary Shares in the 
Company with their pre-tax salary. The shares are purchased in the 
market and then held in trust by Yorkshire Building Society. Employees 
receive dividends on these shares and may give voting instructions 
to the Trustee. 

At the Annual General Meeting in May 2016 shareholders gave 
authority to the Directors to purchase up to 29,523,367 shares, 
representing approximately 14.99 per cent of the Company’s issued 
share capital in the Company, in the market during the period 
expiring at the next Annual General Meeting at a price to be 
determined within certain limits. No Ordinary Shares in the Company 
were purchased during the year or between 31 December 2016 and 
15 March 2017 under this authority, which will expire at the Annual 
General Meeting in May 2017. The Directors will seek to renew the 
authority at that meeting.

70

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Contracts of significance and related parties
There were no contracts of significance between any member of 
the Group and (a) any undertaking in which a Director has a material 
interest, or (b) a controlling shareholder (other than between members 
of the Group). There have been no related party transactions between 
any member of the Group and a related party since the publication 
of the last Annual Report.

There are a number of agreements that take effect, alter or terminate 
upon a change of control of the Group. None of these are considered 
to be significant in terms of their likely impact on the business of the 
Group as a whole.

Articles of Association
The Company’s Articles of Association give powers to the Board to 
appoint Directors. Newly appointed Directors are required to retire 
and submit themselves for re-election by shareholders at the first 
Annual General Meeting following their appointment. 

The Board of Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company, 
subject to the provisions of relevant laws and the Company’s 
Memorandum and Articles of Association. These include specific 
provisions and restrictions regarding the Company’s power to borrow 
money. Powers relating to the issuing and buying back of shares are 
included in the Articles of Association and such authorities are 
renewed by shareholders each year at the Annual General Meeting.

The Articles of Association may be amended by Special Resolution 
of the shareholders.

Directors’ indemnities are referenced on page 40 of the Corporate 
Governance section of the Directors’ Report. The Group has not 
indemnified any Director under the indemnities currently in place.

Directors’ interests
Details of Directors’ remuneration, their interests in the share capital 
of the Company and the share-based payment awards are contained in 
the Remuneration Committee Report on pages 46 to 65. No change 
in the interests of the Directors has been notified between 
31 December 2016 and the date of this report.

Listing Rule requirements
The applicable requirements of Listing Rule 9.8.4R in respect of 
long-term incentive schemes (pages 111 to 114) and contracts 
of significance (page 71) are included in this Annual Report.

Substantial shareholdings
The Company has no controlling shareholder. As at 15 March 2017, 
the Company had been notified, in accordance with DTR Rule 5, 
of the following disclosable interests of 3 per cent or more in its 
voting rights:

Standard Life Investments

Majedie Asset Management

BlackRock

Legal & General Investment Management

Royal London Asset Management

Montanaro Investment Managers

Henderson Global Investors

Unicorn Asset Management

M&G Investment Management

JP Morgan Asset Management

As at
15 March
 2017
%

As at
31 December
 2016
%

9.84

9.13

6.83

5.60

4.43

3.91

3.61

3.56

3.19

3.12

9.36

9.10

6.49

3.03

4.41

4.04

3.59

3.62

3.20

3.16

The Directors’ Report, comprising the Strategic Report, the Corporate Governance Report and the reports of the Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees, has been approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by:

Cathy Baxandall
Group Company Secretary
15 March 2017

71

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEIndependent Auditor’s Report
to the members of Marshalls plc

Opinion on Financial Statements of Marshalls plc
In our opinion:

•  the Financial Statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2016 

and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

•  the Group Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) 

as adopted by the European Union;

•  the Parent Company Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and 

as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

•  the Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group 

Financial Statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

The Financial Statements that we have audited comprise:

•  the Group Income Statement;

•  the Group Statement of Comprehensive Income;

•  the Group and Parent Company Balance Sheets;

•  the Group Cash Flow Statement;

•  the Group and Parent Company Statements of Changes in Equity;

•  the Statement of Accounting Policies; and

•  the related Notes 1 to 40.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union 
and, as regards the Parent Company Financial Statements, as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

Summary of our audit approach

Key risks

The key risks that we identified in the current year were:

•  carrying value of inventory; and

•  completeness of rebate expense. 

These risks are the same as those identified in the prior year.

Materiality

Scoping

The materiality that we used in the current year was £2.3 million, which was determined on the basis of 5 per cent 
of pre-tax profits.

The Group audit team performed the audit of all UK components, which accounted for 96 per cent of Group 
revenue, 98 per cent of Group net assets and 98 per cent of Group profit before tax. 

Marshalls NV, the subsidiary based in Belgium, was audited by Deloitte Antwerp under the supervision of the 
Group audit team.

Significant changes in 
our approach

There have been no significant changes in our audit approach since the previous year.

72

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Separate opinion in relation to IFRSs as issued by the IASB
As explained in Note 1 to the Group Financial Statements, in addition to complying with its legal obligation to apply IFRSs as adopted by the 
European Union, the Group has also applied IFRSs as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”). In our opinion the Group 
Financial Statements comply with IFRSs as issued by the IASB.

Going concern and the Directors’ assessment of the principal risks that would threaten the solvency or liquidity of the Group

As required by the Listing Rules we have reviewed the Directors’ Statement 
regarding the appropriateness of the going concern basis of accounting contained 
within Note 1 to the Financial Statements and the Directors’ Statement on the 
longer-term viability of the Group contained within the Strategic Report, on page 21.

We are required to state whether we have anything material to add or draw 
attention to in relation to:

•  the Directors’ confirmation on page 21 that they have carried out a robust 

assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity;

•  the disclosures on pages 20 to 24 that describe those risks and explain how 

they are being managed or mitigated;

•  the Directors’ Statement in Note 1 to the Financial Statements about whether 
they considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting 
in preparing them and their identification of any material uncertainties to the 
Group’s ability to continue to do so over a period of at least 12 months from 
the date of approval of the Financial Statements; and

•  the Directors’ explanation on page 21 as to how they have assessed the 

prospects of the Group, over what period they have done so and why they 
consider that period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether 
they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue 
in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their 
assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any 
necessary qualifications or assumptions.

Independence

We are required to comply with the Financial Reporting Council’s Ethical Standards for 
Auditors and confirm that we are independent of the Group and we have fulfilled our 
other ethical responsibilities in accordance with those standards.

Our assessment of risks of material misstatement

The assessed risks of material misstatement described below are those that had the greatest 
effect on our audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts 
of the engagement team.

We confirm that we have nothing material to add or 
draw attention to in respect of these matters.

We agreed with the Directors’ adoption of the going 
concern basis of accounting and we did not identify 
any such material uncertainties. However, because not 
all future events or conditions can be predicted, this 
statement is not a guarantee as to the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern.

We confirm that we are independent of the Group 
and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities 
in accordance with those standards. We also confirm 
we have not provided any of the prohibited non-audit 
services referred to in those standards.

73

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEIndependent Auditor’s Report  – continued
to the members of Marshalls plc

Carrying value of inventory 

Risk description

The Group is primarily involved in the manufacture and sale of landscape and natural stone products, selling 
to Public Sector and Commercial and Domestic end users. The Group carries a large amount of inventory 
in order to meet customer demand at any given point in time. Inventory of £68.7 million at the year end 
(2015: £65.3 million) is stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value and is net of relevant provisions. 
The Group offers a wide range of non-perishable products that are manufactured and subsequently stored 
in large quantities at various locations.

A risk exists that the sales prices of inventories, particularly those which are aged or in excess of specific customer 
requirements, may need to be discounted before they can be sold. The risk of discounting, combined with 
potential costs to move inventory to a location of higher demand, may result in some items of inventory 
being sold at a price which is below cost.

How the scope of our 
audit responded to 
the risk

The Directors are responsible for making judgements surrounding:

•  the length of time required to sell inventories;

•  the level of discounts necessary to sell inventories;

•  whether inventories will need to be discounted below their cost price; and

•  the appropriateness of standard costs and the level of provisioning applied.

The carrying value of the Group’s finished goods inventory as disclosed in Note 12 is noted as an area considered 
by the Audit Committee in its report on page 68.

We have:

•  reviewed business processes surrounding the recording of inventory quantities and management’s review  

of the valuation and provisioning of inventory items;

•  evaluated the design and implementation and tested the operating effectiveness of key controls relating 

to purchasing and inventory provisioning across the Group;

•  attended inventory counts at key locations to observe the count procedure being undertaken and inspect 

the condition of inventories;

•  selected a sample of inventory items and agreed key inputs in the valuation such as materials costs, rebates, 

shipping costs, the overheads absorbed and expected sales prices to supporting documentation; 

•  tested the standard cost assessment and year-end adjustment to actual cost; and

•  used data analytic techniques to compare sales and related transport costs by product line to inventory cost 

to identify any inventory sold for less than its cost.

Key observations

The results of our testing were satisfactory and no issues were identified which raised concerns over the basis 
of valuation of inventory and the level of inventory provisions.   

74

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Completeness of rebate expense 

Risk description

The Group enters into a number of commercial rebate agreements with its customers which have varying terms 
and as such a risk exists that rebate agreements with customers are not correctly or completely accounted for, 
potentially resulting in an overstatement of revenue and profit. 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to 
the risk

The Directors are responsible for making judgements relating to the level of year-end accruals to record for rebates 
due to customers.

This is further noted as a matter considered by the Audit Committee in its report on page 68. 

We have:

•  reviewed business processes surrounding the recording of customer rebate expense and the calculation of the 

year-end accrual;

•  evaluated the design and implementation of key controls relating to the customer rebate expense cycle;

•  reviewed a sample of customer rebate agreements and recalculated rebates due at the year end to assess 

whether accruals are calculated in line with contractual terms;

•  performed testing of rebate cut-off to assess whether customer rebate expenses are recognised in the 

appropriate period;

•  performed procedures to consider the accuracy of past rebate accrual estimates by comparing the brought 

forward rebate accrual to cash payments during the year; and

•  reviewed post year-end customer transactions to consider the completeness of the closing accruals.

Key observations

We concluded that the overall levels of year end rebate accruals and the rebate expense recognised by 
management were reasonable.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the Financial Statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, 
and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

75

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEIndependent Auditor’s Report  – continued
to the members of Marshalls plc

Our application of materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the Financial Statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions 
of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work 
and in evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the Financial Statements as a whole as follows:

Group materiality

£2.3 million (2015: £1.8 million)

Basis for determining 
materiality

We determined materiality for the Group to be £2.3 million (2015: £1.8 million), which is 5 per cent of pre-tax profit 
(2015: 5 per cent of pre-tax profit) and below 1.5 per cent of equity.

Rationale for the 
benchmark applied

In our professional judgement, profit before tax is a principal benchmark within the Financial Statements that 
is relevant to users of the Financial Statements. 

Following a reassessment of the levels at which we would report to the Audit Committee, we discussed and agreed with the Audit Committee 
that all audit differences in excess of £100,000 (2015: £35,000) would be reported as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, 
warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing 
the overall presentation of the Financial Statements.

An overview of the scope of our audit
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment, including Group-wide controls, and assessing 
the risks of material misstatement both at the Group and component level. There have been no significant changes to the scope of our audit 
since the previous year. The Group and Parent Company audits are performed at the Group’s head office in Elland, West Yorkshire. All subsidiaries 
of the Group except Marshalls NV, based in Belgium, are both accounted for and have their operations directed from the Group’s head office. 
The Group audit team performed the audit of all UK components, which accounted for 96 per cent of Group revenue, 98 per cent of Group 
net assets and 98 per cent of Group profit before tax. 

Marshalls NV accounted for the remaining revenue, net assets and profit before tax of the Group and was audited by Deloitte Antwerp under 
the supervision of the Group audit team to a component materiality of £0.75 million.

The Group audit team followed a programme of planned visits to the Group’s Belgium site during the year. In addition, the Senior Statutory Auditor 
has been involved in the planning and reporting procedures for all of the Group’s components. In future years we will continue to include the 
component audit partner and team in our team briefing, discuss their risk assessment and review documentation of the findings from their work.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; 

•  the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Financial Statements are 

prepared is consistent with the Financial Statements; and

•  the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the Company and its environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified 
any material misstatements in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report.

76

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Matters on which we are required to report by exception

Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or

We have nothing to report  
in respect of these matters.

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit 

have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the Parent Company Financial Statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

Directors’ remuneration

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ 
remuneration have not been made or the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited is not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report 
arising from these matters.

Corporate Governance Statement

Under the Listing Rules we are also required to review part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the 
Company’s compliance with certain provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code.

We have nothing to report 
arising from our review.

Our duty to read other information in the Annual Report

Under International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland), we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, 
information in the Annual Report is:

•  materially inconsistent with the information in the audited Financial Statements; or

•  apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, our knowledge of the Group acquired in 

We confirm that we have  
not identified any such 
inconsistencies or  
misleading statements.

the course of performing our audit; or

•  otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to consider whether we have identified any inconsistencies between our knowledge 
acquired during the audit and the Directors’ Statement that they consider the Annual Report is fair, balanced and 
understandable and whether the Annual Report appropriately discloses those matters that we communicated to 
the Audit Committee which we consider should have been disclosed.

Respective responsibilities of Directors and Auditor
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the Financial Statements 
and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the Financial Statements in 
accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). We also comply with International Standard on Quality 
Control 1 (UK and Ireland). Our audit methodology and tools aim to ensure that our quality control procedures are effective, understood and 
applied. Our quality controls and systems include our dedicated professional standards review team and independent partner reviews.

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our 
audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an 
Auditor’s Report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other 
than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Scope of the audit of the Financial Statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the Financial Statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance 
that the Financial Statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether 
the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and the Parent Company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and 
adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors; and the overall presentation of 
the Financial Statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report to identify material 
inconsistencies with the audited Financial Statements and to identify any information that is apparently materially incorrect based on, 
or materially inconsistent with, the knowledge acquired by us in the course of performing the audit. If we become aware of any apparent 
material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Christopher Robertson (Senior statutory auditor)
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor
Manchester, UK
15 March 2017

77

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcCORPORATE GOVERNANCEConsolidated Income Statement
for the year ended 31 December 2016

Revenue

Net operating costs

Operating profit

Financial expenses

Financial income

Profit before tax

Income tax expense

Profit for the financial year

Profit for the year

Attributable to:

Equity shareholders of the Parent

Non-controlling interests

Earnings per share

Basic

Diluted

Dividend

Pence per share

Dividends declared

All results relate to continuing operations.

Notes

2

3

2

5

5

2

6

7

7

8

8

2016
£’000

396,922

(349,283)

47,639

(1,594)

1

46,046

(8,539)

37,507

37,350

157

37,507

18.95p

18.61p

9.65p

19,034

2015
£’000

386,204

(348,752)

37,452

(2,181)

7

35,278

(7,387)

27,891

28,149

(258)

27,891

14.32p

14.10p

6.25p

12,291

78

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
for the year ended 31 December 2016

Profit for the financial year

Other comprehensive income / (expense)

Items that will not be reclassified to the Income Statement:

Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability

Deferred tax arising 

Total items that will not be reclassified to the Income Statement

Items that are or may in the future be reclassified to the Income Statement:

Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges

Fair value of cash flow hedges transferred to the Income Statement

Deferred tax arising

Impact of the change in rate of deferred taxation

Exchange difference on retranslation of foreign currency net investment

Exchange movements associated with borrowings

Foreign currency translation differences – non-controlling interests

Total items that are or may be reclassified subsequently to the Income Statement

Other comprehensive income / (expense) for the year, net of income tax

Total comprehensive income for the year

Attributable to:

Equity shareholders of the Parent

Non-controlling interests

2016
£’000

37,507

1,394

(237)

1,157

1,123

1,681

(561)

–

2,729

(2,641)

169

2,500

3,657

41,164

40,838

326

41,164

2015
£’000

27,891

(3,866)

773

(3,093)

(940)

1,984

(209)

(375)

(980)

847

(78)

249

(2,844)

25,047

25,383

(336)

25,047

79

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSConsolidated Balance Sheet
at 31 December 2016

Assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Trade and other receivables

Employee benefits

Deferred taxation assets

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Assets classified as held for sale

Derivative financial instruments

Total assets

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Corporation tax

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Derivative financial instruments

Non-current liabilities

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Deferred taxation liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity

Capital and reserves attributable to equity shareholders of the Parent

Called-up share capital

Share premium account

Own shares

Capital redemption reserve

Consolidation reserve

Hedging reserve

Retained earnings

Equity attributable to equity shareholders of the Parent

Non-controlling interests

Total equity

Approved at a Directors’ meeting on 15 March 2017.

On behalf of the Board:

Martyn Coffey 
Chief Executive 

Jack Clarke
Finance Director

The Notes on pages 84 to 118 form part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

80

Notes

2016
£’000

2015
£’000

9

10

13

18

19

12

13

14

9

17

15

16

17

16

19

20

21

146,995

40,093

208

4,276

1,821

147,489

40,168

415

3,427

1,316

193,393

192,815

68,713

49,010

20,681

624

657

139,685

333,078

79,646

7,388

34

–

87,068

15,234

13,655

28,889

115,957

217,121

49,845

22,695

(3,622)

75,394

(213,067)

590

283,821

215,656

1,465

217,121

65,254

44,542

24,990

2,231

–

137,017

329,832

79,607

5,281

34

2,149

87,071

36,418

13,625

50,043

137,114

192,718

49,845

22,695

(5,529)

75,394

(213,067)

(1,653)

263,894

191,579

1,139

192,718

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
 
 
 
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
for the year ended 31 December 2016

Cash flows from operating activities

Profit for the financial year

Income tax expense 

Profit before tax

Adjustments for:

Depreciation

Amortisation

Associates

Gain on sale of property, plant and equipment

Equity settled share-based payments

Financial income and expenses (net)

Operating cash flow before changes in working capital  
and pension scheme contributions

Increase in trade and other receivables

(Increase) / decrease in inventories

Increase in trade and other payables

Operational restructuring costs paid

Pension scheme contributions

Cash generated from operations

Financial expenses paid

Income tax paid

Net cash flow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment

Financial income received

Net proceeds from disposal of associates

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment

Acquisition of intangible assets

Net cash flow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Payments to acquire own shares

Net decrease in other debt and finance leases

Decrease in borrowings

Equity dividends paid

Net cash flow from financing activities

Net (decrease) / increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

Notes

2016
£’000

2015
£’000

6

9

10

3

3

37,507

8,539

46,046

12,146

1,009

–

(609)

2,884

1,593

63,069

(4,602)

(2,419)

1,868

(476)

–

57,440

(940)

(7,107)

49,393

3,839

1

–

(12,939)

(934)

(10,033)

(1,175)

(40)

(23,791)

(19,034)

(44,040)

(4,680)

24,990

371

20,681

27,891

7,387

35,278

13,054

1,322

582

(149)

2,202

2,174

54,463

(443)

1,706

7,262

(175)

(4,350)

58,463

(1,775)

(7,003)

49,685

933

7

200

(14,016)

(909)

(13,785)

(4,582)

(166)

(14,182)

(12,291)

(31,221)

4,679

20,320

(9)

24,990

81

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSConsolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 December 2016

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

Capital

Own 
shares
£’000

redemption Consolidation
reserve
£’000

reserve
£’000

Hedging
reserve
£’000

Retained
earnings
£’000

Non-
controlling
interests
£’000

Total
£’000

Total
equity
£’000

49,845 22,695

(5,529)

75,394

(213,067)

(1,653) 263,894 191,579

1,139 192,718

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(1,175)

3,082

1,907

1,907

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

– 37,350

37,350

157 37,507

–

88

88

169

257

1,123

1,681

(561)

–

–

–

1,123

1,681

(561)

–

–

1,394

1,394

(237)

(237)

–

–

–

–

–

1,123

1,681

(561)

1,394

(237)

2,243

1,245

3,488

169

3,657

2,243 38,595

40,838

326

41,164

–

–

–

2,884

2,884

122

122

442

442

–

–

–

2,884

122

442

– (19,034)

(19,034)

– (19,034)

–

–

–

(1,175)

(3,082)

–

–

–

(1,175)

–

– (18,668)

(16,761)

– (16,761)

2,243 19,927

24,077

326 24,403

Current year

At 1 January 2016

Total comprehensive income  
for the year

Profit for the financial year 
attributable to equity shareholders 
of the Parent

Other comprehensive  
income / (expense)

Foreign currency translation 
differences

Effective portion of changes in fair 
value of cash flow hedges

Net change in fair value of 
cash flow hedges transferred 
to the Income Statement

Deferred tax arising

Defined benefit plan actuarial gain

Deferred tax arising

Total other comprehensive 
income 

Total comprehensive  
income for the year

Transactions with owners, 
recorded directly in equity

Contributions by and 
distributions to owners

Share-based payments

Deferred tax on  
share-based payments

Corporation tax on  
share-based payments

Dividends to equity shareholders

Purchase of own shares

Disposal of own shares

Total contributions by and 
distributions to owners

Total transactions with owners 
of the Company

At 31 December 2016

49,845 22,695

(3,622)

75,394

(213,067)

590 283,821 215,656

1,465 217,121

82

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

Capital

Own 
shares
£’000

redemption Consolidation
reserve
£’000

reserve
£’000

Hedging
reserve
£’000

Retained
earnings
£’000

Non-
controlling
interests
£’000

Total
£’000

Total
equity
£’000

49,845

22,695

(6,689)

75,394

(213,067)

(2,488) 254,729

180,419

1,475

181,894

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(4,582)

5,742

1,160

1,160

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

28,149

28,149

(258)

27,891

–

(133)

(133)

(78)

(211)

(940)

1,984

(209)

–

–

–

–

–

–

(940)

1,984

(209)

(3,866)

(3,866)

(375)

773

(375)

773

–

–

–

–

–

–

(940)

1,984

(209)

(3,866)

(375)

773

835

(3,601)

(2,766)

(78)

(2,844)

835

24,548

25,383

(336)

25,047

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2,202

2,202

(5)

(5)

445

445

8

8

(12,291)

(12,291)

–

(4,582)

(5,742)

–

(15,383)

(14,223)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2,202

(5)

445

8

(12,291)

(4,582)

–

(14,223)

835

9,165

11,160

(336)

10,824

Prior year

At 1 January 2015

Total comprehensive income / 
(expense) for the year

Profit / (loss) for the financial year 
attributable to equity shareholders 
of the Parent

Other comprehensive  
income / (expense)

Foreign currency translation 
differences

Effective portion of changes in fair 
value of cash flow hedges

Net change in fair value of 
cash flow hedges transferred 
to the Income Statement

Deferred tax arising

Defined benefit plan actuarial losses

Impact of change in rate of 
deferred tax

Deferred tax arising

Total other comprehensive 
income / (expense)

Total comprehensive income / 
(expense) for the year

Transactions with owners, 
recorded directly in equity

Contributions by and 
distributions to owners

Share-based payments

Deferred tax on  
share-based payments

Corporation tax on  
share-based payments

Impact of the change in  
rate of deferred tax on  
share-based payments

Dividends to equity shareholders

Purchase of own shares

Disposal of own shares

Total contributions by and 
distributions to owners

Total transactions with owners 
of the Company

At 31 December 2015

49,845

22,695

(5,529)

75,394

(213,067)

(1,653) 263,894

191,579

1,139

192,718

83

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

1 Accounting policies
Significant accounting policies
Marshalls plc (the “Company”) is a company domiciled in the United Kingdom. The Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company for the 
year ended 31 December 2016 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the “Group”). 

The Consolidated Financial Statements were authorised for issue by the Directors on 15 March 2017.

The following paragraphs summarise the significant accounting policies of the Group, which have been applied consistently in dealing with 
items which are considered material in relation to the Group’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted for use in the EU and therefore the Group Financial 
Statements comply with Article 4 of the EU IAS Regulations. The Group has applied all accounting standards and interpretations issued by the IASB 
and International Financial Reporting Committee relevant to its operations and which are effective in respect of these Financial Statements.

In the current year, the Group has applied a number of amendments to IFRSs issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) 
that are mandatorily effective for an accounting period that begins on or after 1 January 2016. Their adoption has not had any material impact 
on the disclosures or on the amounts reported in these Financial Statements.

•  Amendments to IAS 1 “Disclosure Initiative”. The Group has adopted the amendments to IAS 1 “Disclosure Initiative” for the first time in the 
current year. The amendments clarify that an entity need not provide a specific disclosure required by an IFRS if the information resulting 
from that disclosure is not material, and give guidance on the bases of aggregating and disaggregating information for disclosure purposes. 
However, the amendments reiterate that an entity should consider providing additional disclosures when compliance with the specific 
requirements in IFRSs is insufficient to enable users of financial statements to understand the impact of particular transactions, events and 
conditions on the entity’s financial position and financial performance.

In addition, the amendments clarify that an entity’s share of the other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures accounted 
for using the equity method should be presented separately from those arising from the Group, and should be separated into the share of 
items that, in accordance with other IFRSs: (i) will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss; and (ii) will be reclassified subsequently 
to profit or loss when specific conditions are met.

The amendments also address the structure of the financial statements by providing examples of systematic ordering or grouping of the notes. 

The adoption of these amendments has not resulted in any impact on the financial performance or financial position of the Group.

•  Amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 38 “Clarification of Acceptable Methods of Depreciation and Amortisation”. The Group has adopted the 

amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 38 “Clarification of Acceptable Methods of Depreciation and Amortisation”  for the first time in the current 
year. The amendments to IAS 16 prohibit entities from using a revenue-based depreciation method for items of property, plant and 
equipment. The amendments to IAS 38 introduce a rebuttable presumption that revenue is not an appropriate basis for amortisation 
of an intangible asset. This presumption can only be rebutted in the following two limited circumstances: 

(a)  when the intangible asset is expressed as a measure of revenue; or

(b)  when it can be demonstrated that revenue and consumption of the economic benefits of the intangible asset are highly correlated.

Other than in relation to queries, where a rate of extraction basis for depreciation is applied the Group uses the straight line method for 
depreciation and amortisation for all other items if property, plant and equipment and intangible assets. Consequently, the adoption of 
these amendments has had no impact on the Group’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

•  “Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2012-2014 Cycle”. The Group has adopted the amendments to IFRSs included in the “Annual Improvements to 

IFRSs 2012-2014 Cycle”  for the first time in the current year. 

The amendments to IFRS 5 introduce specific guidance in IFRS 5 for when an entity reclassifies an asset (or disposal group) from held for sale 
to held for distribution to owners (or vice versa). The amendments clarify that such a change should be considered as a continuation of the 
original plan of disposal and hence requirements set out in IFRS 5 regarding the change of sale plan do not apply. The amendments also 
clarify the guidance for when held-for-distribution accounting is discontinued.  

The amendments to IFRS 7 provide additional guidance to clarify whether a servicing contract is continuing involvement in a transferred 
asset for the purpose of the disclosures required in relation to transferred assets.

The amendments to IAS 19 clarify that the rate used to discount post-employment benefit obligations should be determined by reference 
to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds. The assessment of the depth of a market for high 
qualify corporate bonds should be at the currency level (i.e. the same currency as the benefits are to be paid). For currencies for which 
there is no deep market in such high quality corporate bonds, the market yields at the end of the reporting period on Government bonds 
denominated in that currency should be used instead. 

The adoption of these amendments has had no effect on the Group’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

84

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20161 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
At the date of authorisation of these Financial Statements, the Group has not applied the following new and revised IFRSs that have been 
issued but are not yet effective and, in some cases, had not yet been adopted by the EU:

• 

IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments”;

• 

IFRS 15 ”Revenue from Contracts with Customers”;

• 

IFRS 16 “Leases”;

• 

IFRS 2 (amendments) “Classification and Measurement of Share-based Payment Transactions”;

• 

IAS 7 (amendments) “Disclosure Initiative”; and

• 

IAS 12 (amendments) “Recognition of Deferred Tax Assets for Unrealised Losses”.

The Directors do not expect that the adoption of the standards listed above will have a material impact on the Financial Statements of the 
Group in future periods, except as noted below:

• 

IFRS 9 will impact both the measurement and disclosure of financial instruments;

• 

IFRS 15 is not expected to have a material to have a material impact on revenue recognition and related disclosures; and

• 

IFRS 16 will have a material impact on the reported assets, liabilities, income statement and cash flows of the Group. Furthermore, extensive 
disclosures will be required by IFRS 16. The Group has disclosed operating lease commitments at 31 December 2016 amounting to £71.0 
million (2015: £74.0 million) and full disclosures of these are included in Note 23 on page 117.

Beyond the information above, it is not practicable to provide a reasonable estimate of the effect of these standards until a detailed review has 
been completed.  

(a) Statement of compliance
The Group Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared and approved by the Directors in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union (“adopted IFRSs”). The Parent Company has elected to prepare its Financial Statements 
in accordance with FRS 101 and these are presented on pages 119 to 126.

(b) Basis of preparation 
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in the 
Strategic Report on pages 2 to 33. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are also set out 
in the Strategic Report. In addition, Note 17 includes the Group’s policies and procedures for managing its capital; its financial risk management 
objectives; details of its financial instruments; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk.

Details of the Group’s funding position are set out in Note 17 and are subject to normal covenant arrangements. The Group’s on-demand 
overdraft facility is reviewed on an annual basis and the current arrangements were renewed and signed on 16 August 2016. In the opinion of 
the Directors there are sufficient unutilised facilities held which mature after 12 months. The Group’s performance is dependent on economic 
and market conditions, the outlook for which is difficult to predict. Based on current expectations, the Group’s cash forecasts continue to meet 
half-year and year-end bank covenants and there is adequate headroom which is not dependent on facility renewals. The Directors believe 
that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks successfully. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Consolidated Financial Statements are prepared on the historical cost basis except that the following assets and liabilities are stated at their 
fair value: derivative financial instruments and liabilities for cash-settled share-based payments.

The accounting policies have been applied consistently throughout the Group for the purposes of these Consolidated Financial Statements 
and are also set out on the Company’s website (www.marshalls.co.uk).

The Consolidated Financial Statements are presented in Sterling, rounded to the nearest thousand. Sterling is the currency of the primary 
economic environment in which the Group operates.

The preparation of Financial Statements in conformity with adopted IFRSs requires management to make judgements, estimates and 
assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. These are set out in 
Note 26 on page 118. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors that are believed 
to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and 
liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period 
in which the estimate is revised, if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects 
both current and future periods.

85

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
Judgements made by management in the application of adopted IFRSs that have a significant effect on the Consolidated Financial Statements 
and estimates with a significant risk of material adjustment in the next year are discussed in Note 26.

(c) Basis of consolidation
(i) Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries (which are set out in detail in Note 30 on pages 123 and 124) are entities controlled by the Company. Control is achieved when 
the Company:

•  has power over the investee;

• 

is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee; and

•  has the ability to use its power to affect its returns.

The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to 1 or more of the 3 
elements of control listed above. When the Company has less than a majority of the voting rights of an investee, it considers that it has power 
over the investee when the voting rights are sufficient to give it the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee unilaterally. 
The Company considers all relevant facts and circumstances in assessing whether or not the Company’s voting rights in an investee are 
sufficient to give it power, including:

•  the size of the Company’s holding of voting rights relative to the size and dispersion of holdings of the other vote holders;

•  potential voting rights held by the Company, other vote holders or other parties;

•  rights arising from other contractual arrangements; and

•  any additional facts and circumstances that indicate that the Company has, or does not have, the current ability to direct the relevant 

activities at the time that decisions need to be made, including voting patterns at previous shareholders’ meetings.

Consolidation of a subsidiary begins when the Company obtains control over the subsidiary and ceases when the Company loses control 
of the subsidiary. Specifically, the results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the year are included in the Consolidated Income 
Statement from the date the Company gains control until the date when the Company ceases to control the subsidiary. 

(ii) Associates (equity-accounted investees)
Associates are those entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the financial and operating policies. Significant 
influence is presumed to exist when the Group holds between 20 and 50 per cent of the voting power of another entity. Associates are 
accounted for using the equity method (equity-accounted investees) and are recognised initially at cost. The Group’s investment includes 
goodwill identified on acquisition, net of any accumulated impairment losses. The Consolidated Financial Statements include the Group’s share 
of the income and expenses and equity movements of equity-accounted investees, after adjustment to align the accounting policies with 
those of the Group, from the date that significant influence commences until the date that significant influence ceases. When the Group’s 
share of losses exceeds its interest in an equity-accounted investee, the carrying amount of that interest (including any long-term investments) 
is reduced to nil and the recognition of further losses is discontinued except to the extent that the Group has an obligation or has made 
payments on behalf of the investee.

(iii) Transactions eliminated on consolidation
Intra-group balances, and any unrealised gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated 
in preparing the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(iv) Non-controlling interests
Non-controlling interests in subsidiaries are identified separately from the Group’s equity therein. Those interests of non-controlling 
shareholders that are present ownership interests entitling their holders to a proportionate share of net assets are initially measured at the 
non-controlling interests’ proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. Subsequent to acquisition, the carrying amount of 
non-controlling interests is the amount of those interests at the initial recognition plus the non-controlling interests’ share of subsequent 
changes in equity. Total comprehensive income is attributed to non-controlling interests even if this results in the non-controlling interests 
having a deficit balance.

86

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20161 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(d) Foreign currency transactions
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to Sterling at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets 
and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are translated to Sterling at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that 
date. Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement. Non-monetary assets and 
liabilities that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rate at the date of the transaction.

For the purposes of presenting Consolidated Financial Statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign operations are translated at 
exchange rates prevailing on the balance sheet date. Income and expense items are translated at the average exchange rates for the period, 
unless exchange rates fluctuate significantly during that period, in which case the exchange rates at the date of transactions are used.

(e) Derivative financial instruments
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge its exposure to foreign exchange, fuel pricing and interest rate risks arising from 
operational, financing and investment activities. In accordance with its treasury policy, the Group does not hold or issue derivative financial 
instruments for speculative purposes. However, derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting are accounted for as trading instruments.

Derivative financial instruments are recognised at fair value and transaction costs are recognised in the Income Statement when incurred. The gain 
or loss on remeasurement to fair value is recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement. However, where derivatives qualify for 
hedge accounting, recognition of any resultant gain or loss depends on the nature of the item being hedged (see accounting policy (f )). 

(f) Hedging
(i) Cash flow hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised asset or liability, or a highly 
probable forecasted transaction, the effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument is recognised directly in equity. 
When the forecasted transaction subsequently results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or non-financial liability, the associated 
cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and included in the initial cost or other carrying amount of the non-financial asset. For cash 
flow hedges, other than those covered by the preceding policy statement, the associated cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity 
and recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement in the same period or periods during which the hedged forecast transaction affects 
the income or expense. The ineffective part of any gain or loss is recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised or the entity revokes designation of the hedge relationship, but the 
hedged forecast transaction is still expected to occur, it no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting. The cumulative gain or loss at that 
point remains in equity and is recognised in accordance with the above policy when the transaction occurs. If the hedged transaction is no 
longer expected to take place, the cumulative unrealised gain or loss recognised in equity is recognised immediately in the Consolidated 
Income Statement and cash flow hedge accounting is discontinued prospectively.

(ii) Economic hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument is used to hedge economically the foreign exchange exposure of a recognised monetary asset or 
liability, no hedge accounting is applied and any gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement.

(g) Property, plant and equipment
(i) Owned assets
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation (see overleaf ) and impairment losses 
(see accounting policy (m)). The cost of self-constructed assets includes the cost of materials, direct labour and an appropriate 
proportion of directly attributable production overheads.

Certain items of property, plant and equipment that had been revalued to fair value on or prior to 1 January 2004, the date of transition 
to adopted IFRSs, are measured on the basis of deemed cost, being the revalued amount at the date of that revaluation.

Where parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items of property, 
plant and equipment.

(ii) Leased assets
Leases in terms of which the Group assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Property, plant and 
equipment acquired by way of finance lease are stated at an amount equal to the lower of its fair value and the present value of the minimum 
lease payments at inception of the lease, less accumulated depreciation (see overleaf ) and impairment losses (see accounting policy (m)).

(iii) Subsequent costs
The Group recognises in the carrying amount of an item of property, plant and equipment the cost of replacing part of such an item when that 
cost is incurred if it is probable that the future economic benefits embodied within the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can 
be measured reliably. All other costs are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement as an expense as incurred.

87

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(g) Property, plant and equipment continued
(iv) Depreciation
Depreciation is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement on a straight line basis over the estimated useful lives of each part of an item of 
property, plant and equipment. Depreciation on quarries is based on estimated rates of extraction. This is based on a comparison between the 
volume of relevant material extracted in any given period and the volume of relevant material available for extraction. Depreciation on leased 
assets is charged over the shorter of the lease term and their useful economic life. Freehold land is not depreciated. The rates are as follows:

Freehold and long leasehold buildings 

Short leasehold property 

Fixed plant and equipment 

Mobile plant and vehicles 

Quarries 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2.5 per cent to 5 per cent per annum

over the period of the lease

3.3 per cent to 25 per cent per annum

14 per cent to 30 per cent per annum

based on rates of extraction

The residual values, useful economic lives and depreciation methods are reassessed annually. Assets under construction are not depreciated 
until they are ready for use.

Site preparation costs associated with the development of new stone reserves are capitalised. These costs would include:

•  costs of clearing the site (including internal and outsourced labour in relation to site workers);

•  professional fees (including fees relating to obtaining planning consent);

•  purchase, installation and assembly of any necessary extraction equipment; and

•  costs of testing whether the extraction process is functioning properly (net of any sales of test products).

Depreciation commences when commercial extraction commences and is based on the rate of extraction.

In accordance with IAS 37, provision is made for quarry restoration where a legal or constructive obligation exists, it is probable that an outflow 
of economic benefits will occur and the financial cost of restoration work can be reliably measured. The lives of quarries are almost always long 
and it is difficult to estimate the length with any precision. The majority of quarry restoration work is undertaken while extracting minerals from 
new areas (backfilling) and therefore work can be completed without additional cost. As a result of the particular characteristics of the Group’s 
quarries, the IAS 37 criteria have not been met to date based on the assets so far acquired and, therefore, no provisions have been recognised. 

(h) Intangible assets
(i) Goodwill
All business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method as at the acquisition date, which is the date on which control 
is transferred to the Group.

For acquisitions on or after 1 January 2004, the Group measures goodwill at the acquisition date as:

•  the fair value of the consideration transferred; plus 

•  the recognised amount of any non-controlling interests in the acquiree; plus

•  the fair value of the existing equity interest in the acquiree; less

•  the net recognised amount (generally fair value) of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed. 

When the excess is negative, a bargain purchase gain is recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement.

Costs relating to the acquisition, other than those associated with the issue of debt or equity securities, are expensed as incurred.

Any contingent consideration payable is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. If the contingent consideration is classified as equity, 
it is not remeasured and settlement is accounted for within equity. Otherwise, subsequent changes to the fair value of the contingent 
consideration are recognised in profit or loss.

On a transaction-by-transaction basis, the Group elects to measure non-controlling interests either at their fair value or at their proportionate 
interest in the recognised amount of the identifiable net assets of the acquiree at the acquisition date.

In respect of business acquisitions that have occurred since 1 January 2004, goodwill represents the difference between the cost of the acquisition 
and the fair value of the net identifiable assets and contingent liabilities acquired. The classification and accounting treatment of business 
combinations that occurred prior to 1 January 2016 were not adjusted in preparing the Group’s opening IFRS balance sheet at 1 January 2016.

88

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
 
 
 
 
 
1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(h) Intangible assets continued
(i) Goodwill continued
In respect of acquisitions prior to 1 January 2004, goodwill is included on the basis of its deemed cost, which represents the amount recorded 
under the Group’s previous accounting framework. The classification and accounting treatment of business combinations that occurred prior 
to 1 January 2004 were not adjusted in preparing the Group’s opening IFRS balance sheet at 1 January 2004.

Goodwill is subsequently stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units and is tested 
annually for impairment (see accounting policy (m)). In respect of equity-accounted investees, the carrying amount of goodwill is included 
in the carrying amount of the investment in the investee.

In respect of acquisitions where there is a contingent consideration element, an accrual is created for the estimated amount payable if it is 
probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and this can be measured reliably.

(ii) Research and development
Expenditure on research activities, undertaken with the prospect of gaining new scientific or technical knowledge and understanding, is 
recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement as an expense as incurred.

Expenditure on development activities, whereby research findings are applied to a plan or design for the production of new or substantially 
improved products and processes, is capitalised if the product or process meets the recognition criteria for development expenditure as set 
out in IAS 38 “Intangible Assets”. The expenditure capitalised includes all directly attributable costs, from the date which the intangible asset 
meets the recognition criteria, necessary to create, produce and prepare the asset to be capable of operating in the manner intended by 
management. Other development expenditure is recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement as an expense as incurred. Capitalised 
development expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation (see below) and impairment losses (see accounting policy (m)).

(iii) Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation (see below) and impairment losses 
(see accounting policy (m)). 

Expenditure on internally generated goodwill and brands is recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement as an expense as incurred.

(iv) Subsequent expenditure
Subsequent expenditure on capitalised intangible assets is capitalised only when it increases the future economic benefits embodied 
in the specific asset to which it relates. All other expenditure is expensed as incurred.

(v) Amortisation
Amortisation is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement on a straight line basis over the estimated useful lives of intangible assets 
unless such lives are indefinite. Goodwill is systematically tested for impairment at each balance sheet date. Other intangible assets are 
amortised from the date they are available for use. The rates applied are as follows:

Customer and supplier relationships 

Patents, trademarks and know-how 

Development costs 

Software 

– 

– 

– 

– 

5 to 20 years

2 to 20 years

10 to 20 years

5 to 10 years

(i) Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are stated at their nominal amount (discounted if material) less impairment losses (see accounting policy (m)).

(j) Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course 
of business, less the estimated costs to completion and of selling expenses. 

The cost of inventories is based on the first-in, first-out principle and includes expenditure incurred in acquiring the inventories and bringing 
them to their existing location and condition. In the case of manufactured inventories and work in progress, cost includes an appropriate share 
of overheads based on normal operating capacity, which were incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition.

(k) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances and call deposits. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the 
Group’s cash management are included as a component of cash and cash equivalents for the purpose of the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement. 

(l) Assets classified as held for sale
Assets classified as held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell. Assets are classified as held for sale if their carrying 
amount will be recovered through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. This condition is regarded as met only when the sale is highly 
probable and expected to be completed within 1 year from the date of classification, and the asset is available for immediate sale in its present condition.

89

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(m) Impairment 
(i) Impairment review
The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets, other than inventories (see accounting policy (j)) and deferred tax assets (see accounting policy (w)), 
are reviewed at each balance sheet date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, the asset’s 
recoverable amount is estimated.

For goodwill, assets that have an indefinite useful life and intangible assets that are not yet available for use, the recoverable amount 
is estimated at each balance sheet date. 

An impairment loss is recognised whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cash generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount. 
Impairment losses are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement.

Impairment losses recognised in respect of cash generating units are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to cash 
generating units and then to reduce the carrying amount of the other assets in the unit on a pro-rata basis. A cash generating unit is the group of 
assets identified on acquisition that generate cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.

The recoverable amount of assets or cash generating units is the greater of their fair value less costs to sell and value in use. In assessing value 
in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. For an asset that does not generate largely independent cash 
inflows, the recoverable amount is determined for the cash generating unit to which the asset belongs.

(ii) Reversals of impairments 
An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. In respect of other assets, an impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change 
in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount.

An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have 
been determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, if no impairment loss had been recognised.

(n) Share capital
(i) Share capital
Share capital is classified as equity if it is non-redeemable and any dividends are discretionary, or if it is redeemable but only at the Company’s 
option. Dividends on share capital classified as equity are recognised as distributions within equity. Non-equity share capital is classified as 
a liability if it is redeemable on a specific date or at the option of the shareholders or if dividend payments are not discretionary. Dividends 
thereon are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement as a financial expense.

(ii) Dividends 
Dividends on non-equity shares are recognised as a liability and accounted for on an accruals basis. Equity dividends are recognised 
as a liability in the period in which they are declared (appropriately authorised and no longer at the discretion of the Company).

(o) Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption value being recognised 
in the Consolidated Income Statement over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis.

(p) Pension schemes
(i) Defined benefit schemes 
The net obligation in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme is calculated by estimating the amount of future benefit that employees 
have earned in return for their service in the current and prior periods; that benefit is discounted to determine its present value and the fair value of 
any scheme assets is deducted. The discount rate is the yield at the balance sheet date on AA credit-rated corporate bonds that have maturity dates 
approximating to the terms of the Group’s obligations. The calculation is performed by a qualified actuary using the projected unit credit method.

If the calculation results in a surplus, the resulting asset is measured at the present value of any economic benefits available in the form 
of refunds from the plan, or reductions in future contributions to the plan. The present value of these economic benefits is discounted 
by reference to market yields at the balance sheet date on high quality corporate bonds.

When the benefits of the scheme are improved, the portion of the increased benefit relating to past service by employees is recognised 
as an expense in the Income Statement in the period of the scheme amendment.

Actuarial gains and losses that arise in calculating the Group’s obligation in respect of a plan are recognised immediately within the 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income.

(ii) Defined contribution schemes
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution schemes are recognised as an expense in the Income Statement as incurred.

90

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20161 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(q) Share-based payment transactions
The Group enters into equity settled share-based payment transactions with its employees. In particular, annual awards are made to 
employees under the Company’s Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”) and there are also outstanding awards from previous years under 
the 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”).

The fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding increase in equity. The fair value is measured 
at grant date and spread over the period during which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. Where appropriate, 
the fair value of the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon which the options were granted. The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for which the 
related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised as an expense is based 
on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the vesting date.

Current tax relief is available as shares vest based on the value at the date of vesting. A deferred tax asset is recognised at grant date based on 
the number of shares expected to be issued, at the value at which they are expected to be issued, proportioned in line with the vesting period.

(r) Own shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust
Transactions of the Group-sponsored Employee Benefit Trust are included in the Group Financial Statements. In particular, the Trust’s purchases 
of shares in the Company are debited directly to equity.

(s) Provisions
A provision is recognised in the Consolidated Balance Sheet when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past 
event, it can be measured reliably and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. If the effect 
is material, provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments 
of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability.

A provision for restructuring is recognised when the Group has approved a detailed and formal restructuring plan, and the restructuring has 
either commenced or has been announced publicly. Future operating costs are not provided for.

(t) Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at nominal amount (discounted if material).

(u) Revenue
Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement upon the despatch of goods, when the significant risks 
and rewards of ownership of the goods have been transferred to the buyer. Revenue represents the invoiced value of sales to customers less 
returns, allowances, rebates and value added tax.

No revenue is recognised if there are significant uncertainties regarding recovery of the consideration due or the possible return of goods 
or continuing management involvement with the goods.

(v) Expenses
(i) Operating lease payments
Payments made under operating leases are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement on a straight line basis over the term of the 
lease. Lease incentives received are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement over the life of the lease.

(ii) Finance lease payments
Minimum lease payments are apportioned between the finance charge and the reduction of the outstanding liability. The finance charge is 
allocated to each period during the lease term so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability.

(iii) Financial expenses
Net financial expenses comprise interest on obligations under the defined benefit pension scheme, the expected return on scheme assets 
under the defined benefit pension scheme, interest payable on borrowings (including finance leases) calculated using the effective interest 
rate method, dividends on non-equity shares, interest receivable on funds invested, dividend income, foreign exchange gains and losses and 
gains and losses on hedging instruments that are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement (see accounting policy (f )).

91

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
(w) Income tax
Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred taxation. Income tax is recognised in the Consolidated Income 
Statement except to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in other comprehensive or in equity, in which case it is 
recognised accordingly.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred taxation is provided using the balance sheet liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not 
provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill, the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, 
other than in a business combination, and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in 
the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred taxation provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying 
amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates that are expected to apply when the temporary difference reverses, based on rates that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

A deferred taxation asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset 
can be utilised. Deferred taxation assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realised. 

Additional income taxes that arise from the distribution of dividends are recognised at the same time as the liability to pay the related dividend.

(x) Segment reporting
IFRS 8 “Operating Segments” requires operating segments to be identified on the basis of discrete financial information about components of the 
Group that are regularly reviewed by the Group’s Chief Operating Decision Maker (“CODM”) to allocate resources to the segments and to assess 
their performance. As far as Marshalls is concerned the CODM is regarded as being the Executive Directors. The Directors have concluded that the 
Group’s Landscape Products business is a single reportable segment, which includes the UK operations of the Marshalls Landscape Products hard 
landscaping business, servicing both the UK Domestic and the Public Sector and Commercial end markets. Financial information for Landscape 
Products is now reported to the Group’s CODM for the assessment of segment performance and to facilitate resource allocation.

2 Segmental analysis
Segment revenues and results

Total revenue

Inter-segment revenue

External revenue

Segment operating profit

Unallocated administration costs

Associates

Operating profit

Finance charges (net)

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit after tax

2016

2015

Landscape
Products
£’000

311,100

(89)

311,011

50,441

Other
£’000

89,070

(3,159)

85,911

3,157

Total
£’000

400,170

(3,248)

396,922

53,598

(5,959)

–

47,639

(1,593)

46,046

(8,539)

37,507

Landscape
Products
£’000

299,650

(123)

299,527

41,816

Other
£’000

90,915

(4,238)

86,677

1,763

Total
£’000

390,565

(4,361)

386,204

43,579

(5,545)

(582)

37,452

(2,174)

35,278

(7,387)

27,891

92

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20162 Segmental analysis continued
Segment revenues and results continued
The Group has 2 customers who each contributed more than 10 per cent of total revenue in the current and prior year.

The Landscape Products reportable segment operates a national manufacturing plan that is structured around a series of production units 
throughout the UK, in conjunction with a single logistics and distribution operation. A national planning process supports sales to both of the 
key end markets, namely the UK Domestic and Public Sector and Commercial end markets and the operating assets produce and deliver a 
range of broadly similar products that are sold into each of these end markets. Within the Landscape Products operating segment the focus 
is on the 1 integrated production, logistics and distribution network supporting both end markets.

Included in “Other” are the Group’s Street Furniture, Mineral Products, Stone Cladding and International operations, which do not currently 
meet the IFRS 8 reporting requirements.

The accounting policies of the Landscape Products operating segment are the same as the Group’s accounting policies. Segment profit 
represents the profit earned without allocation of the share of profit of associates and certain central administration costs that are not capable 
of allocation. Centrally administered overhead costs that relate directly to the reportable segment are included within the segment’s results.

Segment assets 

Fixed assets and inventory:

Landscape Products

Other

Total segment fixed assets and inventory

Unallocated assets

Consolidated total assets

2016
£’000

2015
£’000

157,786

57,922

215,708

117,370

333,078

156,112

56,631

212,743

117,089

329,832

For the purpose of monitoring segment performance and allocating resources between segments, the Group’s CODM monitors the tangible 
fixed assets and inventory. Assets used jointly by reportable segments are not allocated to individual reportable segments.

Other segment information

Landscape Products

Other

Geographical destination of revenue

United Kingdom

Rest of the World

Depreciation and amortisation

Fixed asset additions

2016
£’000

9,462

3,693

13,155

2015
£’000

10,465

3,911

14,376

2016
£’000

9,131

3,883

13,014

2016
£’000

377,659

19,263

396,922

2015
£’000

11,678

3,816

15,494

2015
£’000

367,248

18,956

386,204

The Group’s revenue is subject to seasonal fluctuations resulting from demand from customers. In particular, demand is higher in the summer 
months. The Group manages the seasonal impact through the use of a seasonal working capital facility.

93

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

3 Net operating costs

Raw materials and consumables

Changes in inventories of finished goods and work in progress

Personnel costs

Depreciation 

Amortisation of intangible assets

Own work capitalised

Other operating costs

Restructuring costs

Operating costs

Other operating income

Net gain on asset and property disposals

Associates

Net operating costs

Net operating costs include:

Auditor’s remuneration (see below)

Leasing costs

Hire of plant and machinery

Research and development costs

In respect of the year under review, Deloitte LLP carried out work in relation to:

Audit of Marshalls plc

Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries of the Company

Half-yearly review of Marshalls plc

4 Personnel costs

Personnel costs (including amounts charged in the year in relation to Directors):

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Share-based payments

Contributions to defined contribution pension scheme

Included within net operating costs (Note 3)

Personnel costs relating to restructuring (Note 3)

Total personnel costs

94

2016
£’000

2015
£’000

142,011

141,471

2,591

98,128

12,146

1,009

(1,381)

97,069

476

352,049

(2,157)

(609)

–

(1,801)

96,716

13,054

1,322

(1,810)

100,707

–

349,659

(1,340)

(149)

582

349,283

348,752

2016
£’000

163

10,151

4,943

3,364

2016
£’000

20

123

20

163

2016
£’000

79,605

9,361

3,750

5,412

98,128

476

98,604

2015
£’000

160

9,203

4,881

3,134

2015
£’000

20

120

20

160

2015
£’000

79,691

9,260

2,490

5,275

96,716

–

96,716

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20164 Personnel costs continued

Remuneration of Directors:

Salary

Other benefits

MIP Element A bonus

MIP Element B bonus

Amounts receivable under the 2005 LTIP

Salary supplement in lieu of pension

Non-Executive Directors’ fees and fixed allowances

2016
£’000

699

39

844

339

956

139

310

2015
£’000

649

34

734

325

816

129

317

3,326

3,004

The aggregate of emoluments and amounts receivable under the MIP and the 2005 LTIP of the highest paid Director was £1,913,000 
(2015: £2,064,000), including a salary supplement in lieu of pension of £84,000 (2015: £82,000).

There are no Directors to whom retirement benefits are accruing in respect of qualifying services. As set out in the Annual Remuneration Report 
on page 58, the Executive Directors receive a salary supplement in lieu of pension equal to their contractual entitlement of 20 per cent of basic salary.

Further details of Directors’ remuneration, share options, long-term incentive plans and Directors’ pension entitlements are disclosed in the 
Annual Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 65.

The average monthly number of persons employed by the Group during the year was:

Continuing operations

5 Financial expenses and income

(a) Financial expenses

Net interest expense on defined benefit pension scheme

Interest expense on bank loans, overdrafts and loan notes

Finance lease interest expense

(b) Financial income

Interest receivable and similar income

Net interest expense on defined benefit pension scheme is disclosed net of Company recharges.

6 Income tax expense

Current tax expense

Current year

Adjustments for prior years

Deferred taxation expense

Origination and reversal of temporary differences:

Current year

Adjustments for prior years

Total tax expense

2016
Number

2,253

2016
£’000

445

1,143

6

1,594

2015
Number

2,237

2015
£’000

406

1,767

8

2,181

1

7

2016
£’000

10,611

(921)

9,690

(1,098)

(53)

8,539

2015
£’000

8,164

289

8,453

(684)

(382)

7,387

95

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

6 Income tax expense continued

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit before tax

Tax using domestic corporation tax rate

Impact of capital allowances in excess of depreciation

Short-term timing differences

Adjustment to tax charge in prior year

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Corporation tax charge for the year

Impact of capital allowances in excess of depreciation

Short-term timing differences

Pension scheme movements

Other items

Adjustment to tax charge in prior year

Impact of the change in the rate of corporation tax on deferred taxation

Total tax charge for the year

2016
%

100.0

20.0

0.4

1.0

(2.0)

1.6

21.0

(1.0)

(0.1)

0.3

(0.9)

(0.1)

(0.7)

18.5

2016
£’000

46,046

9,209

173

480

(921)

749

9,690

(443)

(66)

127

(397)

(53)

(319)

8,539

2015
%

100.0

20.2

2.0

(0.2)

0.8

1.1

23.9

(1.0)

(0.2)

2.1

(0.3)

(1.1)

(2.5)

20.9

2015
£’000

35,278

7,144

710

(81)

289

391

8,453

(355)

(79)

746

(100)

(382)

(896)

7,387

The net amount of deferred taxation (debited) / credited to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income in the year was £798,000 
debit (2015: £189,000 credit).

The majority of the Group’s profits are earned in the UK with the standard rate of corporation tax being 20 per cent for the year to 31 December 2016.

Capital allowances are tax reliefs provided in law for the expenditure the Group makes on fixed assets. The rates are determined by Parliament 
annually, and spread the tax relief due over a number of years. This contrasts with the accounting treatment for such spending, where the 
expenditure on fixed assets is treated as an investment with the cost then being spread over the anticipated useful life of the asset, and / or 
impaired if the value of such assets is considered to have reduced materially.

The different accounting treatment of fixed assets for tax and accounting purposes is one reason why the taxable income of the Group is not 
the same as its accounting profit. During the year to 31 December 2016 the depreciation charge for the year exceeded the capital allowances 
due to the Group.

Short-term timing differences arise on items such as depreciation in stock and share-based payments because the treatment of such items 
is different for tax and accounting purposes. These differences usually reverse in the years following those in which they arise, as is reflected 
in the deferred tax charge in the Financial Statements.

Adjustments to tax charges arising in earlier years arise because the tax charge to be included in a set of accounts has to be estimated before 
those financial statements are finalised. Such charges therefore include some estimates that are checked and refined before the Group’s 
corporation tax returns for the year are submitted to HM Revenue & Customs, which may reflect a different liability as a result.

Some expenses incurred may be entirely appropriate charges for inclusion in the Financial Statements but are not allowed as a deduction 
against taxable income when calculating the Group’s tax liability for the same accounting period. Examples of such disallowable expenditure 
include business entertainment costs and some legal expenses.

As can be seen from the tax reconciliation, the process of adjustment that can give rise to current year adjustments to tax charges arising in 
previous periods can also give rise to revisions in prior year deferred tax estimates. This is why the current year adjustments to the current year 
charge for capital allowances and short-term timing differences are not exactly replicated in the deferred taxation charge for the year.

The Group’s overseas operations comprise a manufacturing operation in Belgium and sales and administration offices in the USA, China and 
Dubai. The sales of these units, in total, were less than 5 per cent of the Group’s turnover in the year to 31 December 2016. In total, the trading 
profits were not material and no tax was due.

7 Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share of 18.95 pence (2015: 14.32 pence) per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to Ordinary Shareholders 
for the financial year, after adjusting for non-controlling interests, of £37,350,000 (2015: £28,149,000) by the weighted average number of shares 
in issue during the period of 197,130,419 (2015: 196,574,435).

96

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20167 Earnings per share continued
Profit attributable to Ordinary Shareholders

Profit for the financial year

(Profit)/loss attributable to non-controlling interests

Profit attributable to Ordinary Shareholders

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares

Number of issued Ordinary Shares (at beginning of the year)

Effect of shares transferred into employee benefit trust

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares at end of the year 

2016
£’000

37,507

(157)

37,350

2015
£’000

27,891

258

28,149

2016
Number

2015
Number

199,378,755

199,378,755

(2,248,336)

(2,804,320)

197,130,419

196,574,435

Diluted earnings per share of 18.61 pence (2015: 14.10 pence) per share is calculated by dividing the profit for the financial year, after adjusting 
for non-controlling interests, of £37,350,000 (2015: £28,149,000) by the weighted average number of shares in issue during the period of 
197,130,419 (2015: 196,574,435) plus potentially dilutive shares of 3,561,243 (2015: 3,092,619), which totals 200,691,662 (2015: 199,667,054).

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (diluted)

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares 

Potentially dilutive shares

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (diluted) 

2016
Number

2015
Number

197,130,419

196,574,435

3,561,243

3,092,619

200,691,662

199,667,054

8 Dividends
After the balance sheet date a final dividend of 5.80 pence (2015: 4.75 pence) per qualifying Ordinary Share was proposed by the Directors. 
In addition a supplementary dividend of 3.00 pence (2015: 2.00 pence) per qualifying Ordinary Share was proposed by the Directors. These 
dividends have not been provided for and there are no income tax consequences. The total dividends proposed in respect of the year are 
as follows:

2016 supplementary

2016 final

2016 interim

2015 supplementary

2015 final

2015 interim

The following dividends were approved by the shareholders and recognised in the year:

2016 interim

2015 supplementary

2015 final

2015 interim

2014 final

2016
£’000

5,917

11,440

5,720

23,077

2016
£’000

5,720

3,945

9,369

19,034

Pence per
qualifying share

3.00

5.80

2.90

11.70

2.00

4.75

2.25

9.00

Pence per
qualifying share

2.90

2.00

4.75

9.65

2.25

4.00

6.25

2015
£’000

3,988

9,470

4,425

17,883

2015
£’000

4,425

7,866

12,291

97

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

8 Dividends continued
The Board recommends a 2016 final dividend of 5.80 pence per qualifying Ordinary Share (amounting to £11,440,000), alongside a 
supplementary dividend of 3.00 pence per qualifying Ordinary Share (amounting to £5,917,000), to be paid on 30 June 2017 to shareholders 
registered at the close of business on 16 June 2017.

9 Property, plant and equipment

Cost

At 1 January 2015

Exchange differences

Additions

Reclassified as held for sale

Disposals

At 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2016

Exchange differences

Additions

Reclassified as held for sale

Disposals

At 31 December 2016 

Depreciation and impairment losses

At 1 January 2015

Depreciation charge for the year

Exchange differences

Disposals

At 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2016

Depreciation charge for the year

Reclassifications and transfers to assets held for sale

Exchange differences

Disposals

At 31 December 2016 

Net book value

At 1 January 2015

At 31 December 2015

At 31 December 2016

Land and
buildings
£’000

85,932

(449)

1,343

(2,231)

(203)

84,392

84,392

944

551

(1,910)

(297)

Quarries
£’000

Plant, machinery
and vehicles
£’000

Total
£’000

412,192

(749)

14,585

(2,231)

(3,020)

304,850

(300)

11,701

–

(2,817)

313,434

420,777

313,434

420,777

624

11,083

–

(1,665)

1,568

12,080

(1,910)

(1,962)

21,410

–

1,541

–

–

22,951

22,951

–

446

–

–

83,680

23,397

323,476

430,553

34,752

1,825

(3)

(7)

36,567

36,567

1,814

(1,286)

15

(94)

6,656

348

–

–

7,004

7,004

531

288

–

–

221,039

10,881

(158)

(2,045)

229,717

229,717

9,801

–

382

(1,181)

262,447

13,054

(161)

(2,052)

273,288

273,288

12,146

(998) 

397

(1,275)

37,016

7,823

238,719

283,558

51,180

47,825

46,664

14,754

15,947

15,574

83,811

83,717

149,745

147,489

84,757

146,995

Mineral reserves and associated land have been separately disclosed under the heading of “Quarries”.

During the year ended 31 December 2016, land and buildings with a book value of £624,000 (2015: £2,231,000) have been reclassified as held 
for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 “Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations”. Assets disclosed as held for sale as at 
31 December 2015 have been disposed of in the year ended 31 December 2016.

98

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 20169 Property, plant and equipment continued
The carrying amount of tangible fixed assets includes £402,000 (2015: £402,000) in respect of assets held under finance leases. Group cost of land 
and buildings and plant and machinery includes £nil (2015: £140,000) and £999,000 (2015: £8,011,000) respectively for assets in the course of construction.

Capital commitments

Capital expenditure that has been contracted for but for which no provision has been made in the 
Consolidated Financial Statements

Depreciation charge
The depreciation charge is recognised in the following line items in the Consolidated Income Statement:

2016
£’000

1,427

2015
£’000

550

2016
£’000

12,146

2015
£’000

13,054

Net operating costs (Note 3)

10 Intangible assets

Cost

At 1 January 2015

Additions

At 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2016

Additions

Goodwill
£’000

Customer
relationships
£’000

Supplier

relationships and know-how
£’000

£’000

trademarks Development
costs
£’000

Software
£’000

Total
£’000

Patents,

43,691

–

43,691

2,210

–

2,210

1,200

1,660

–

–

1,200

1,660

159

–

159

10,767

59,687

909

909

11,676

60,596

43,691

2,210

1,200

1,660

159

11,676

60,596

–

–

–

–

–

934

934

At 31 December 2016

43,691

2,210

1,200

1,660

159

12,610

61,530

Amortisation and impairment losses

At 1 January 2015

Amortisation for the year

At 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2016

Amortisation for the year

At 31 December 2016

Carrying amounts

At 1 January 2015

At 31 December 2015

At 31 December 2016

8,912

–

8,912

2,210

–

2,210

8,912

2,210

–

–

8,912

2,210

34,779

34,779

34,779

–

–

–

668

60

728

728

60

788

532

472

412

1,334

32

1,366

1,366

32

1,398

326

294

262

85

8

93

93

8

5,897

1,222

7,119

19,106

1,322

20,428

7,119

20,428

909

1,009

101

8,028

21,437

74

66

58

4,870

4,557

40,581

40,168

4,582

40,093

All goodwill has arisen from business combinations. The carrying amount of goodwill is allocated across cash generating units (“CGUs”) and 
these CGUs are independent sources of income streams and represent the lowest level within the Group at which the associated goodwill 
is monitored for management purposes. The Group tests goodwill annually for impairment, or more frequently if there are indications that 
goodwill might be impaired.

99

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

10 Intangible assets continued
The recoverable amounts of the CGUs are determined from value-in-use calculations and at both 31 December 2016 and 31 December 2015 
the full amount of goodwill in the Group Balance Sheet related to the Landscape Products CGU. These calculations use cash flow projections 
based on a combination of individual financial 5-year forecasts, containing assumptions for revenue growth and operational gearing, and 
appropriate long-term growth rates of 2.5 per cent. To prepare value-in-use calculations, the cash flow forecasts are discounted back to 
present value using an appropriate market-based discount rate. The pre-tax discount rate used to calculate the value in use was 9.5 per cent 
(2015: 10.0 per cent). The Directors have reviewed the recoverable amounts of the CGUs and do not consider that any reasonable change 
in the assumptions would give rise to the need for further impairment.

Included in software additions is £819,000 (2015: £739,000) of own work capitalised.

Amortisation charge
The amortisation charge is recognised in the following line items in the Consolidated Income Statement:

Net operating costs (Note 3)

11 Investment in associates

Carrying value

At 1 January

Share of results of associates

Impairment losses

Disposals

At 31 December 

Investment at cost

Impairment losses

Cumulative share of results of associates

Disposals

Carrying value at 31 December

2016
£’000

1,009

2016
£’000

–

–

–

–

–

2016
£’000

–

–

–

–

–

2015
£’000

1,322

2015
£’000

782

71

(653)

(200)

–

2015
£’000

2,250

(2,219)

169

(200)

–

On 31 December 2015 the Group disposed of its 25 per cent stake in Creeton Quarry Limited and Oathill Quarry Limited for proceeds of £200,000.

The Group’s share of results of associates in the year ended 31 December 2016 was £nil (2015: £71,000 profit) and, on the grounds 
of materiality, no additional disclosure has been made.

12 Inventories 

Raw materials and consumables

Finished goods and goods for resale

2016
£’000

13,788

54,925

68,713

2015
£’000

12,998

52,256

65,254

Inventories stated at a net realisable value less than cost at 31 December 2016 amounted to £7,848,000 (2015: £6,745,000). The write down 
of inventories made during the year amounted to £2,868,000 (2015: £3,797,000). There were no reversals of inventory write-downs made in 
previous years in either 2016 or 2015. 

100

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201613 Trade and other receivables 

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Prepayments and accrued income

Ageing of trade receivables

Neither impaired nor past due

Not impaired but overdue by less than 30 days

Not impaired but overdue by between 30 and 60 days

Not impaired but overdue by more than 60 days

2016
£’000

42,133

3,003

3,874

49,010

2016
£’000

23,687

14,499

2,032

1,915

42,133

2015
£’000

38,101

2,174

4,267

44,542

2015
£’000

19,932

13,214

2,397

2,558

38,101

Receivables totalling £208,000 (2015: £415,000) were due after more than 1 year. All amounts disclosed above are considered recoverable and 
are disclosed net of an allowance for doubtful debts of £804,000 (2015: £833,000).

14 Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank balances

Cash in hand

Cash and cash equivalents in the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

15 Trade and other payables 

Current liabilities

Trade payables

Taxation and social security

Other payables

Accruals

All trade payables are due in 6 months or less.

2016
£’000

20,661

20

20,681

2016
£’000

36,605

9,217

19,148

14,676

79,646

2015
£’000

24,964

26

24,990

2015
£’000

37,356

8,775

16,942

16,534

79,607

101

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

16 Loans

Current liabilities

Finance lease liabilities 

Non-current liabilities

Bank loans

Finance lease liabilities

2016
£’000

34

14,975

259

15,234

2015
£’000

34

36,125

293

36,418

Bank loans
The bank loans are secured by intra-group guarantees with certain subsidiary undertakings.

Finance lease liabilities

2016

2015

Less than 1 year

1 to 2 years

2 to 5 years

In more than 5 years

Minimum
lease
payments
£’000

40

40

120

120

320

Interest
£’000

Principal
£’000

6

5

11

5

27

34

35

109

115

293

Minimum
lease
payments
£’000

40

40

120

160

360

Interest
£’000

Principal
£’000

6

6

13

8

33

34

34

107

152

327

17 Financial instruments
The Group holds and uses financial instruments to finance its operations and to manage its interest rate, liquidity and currency risks. The Group 
primarily finances its operations using share capital, retained profits and borrowings. The Group’s bank loans are non-equity funding 
instruments, further details of which are set out on page 106.

As directed by the Board, the Group does not engage in speculative activities using derivative financial instruments. Group cash reserves are 
held centrally to take advantage of the most rewarding short-term investment opportunities. Forward foreign currency contracts are used 
in the management of currency risk.

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are interest rate risk, liquidity risk, foreign currency risk and pricing risk. The Board 
reviews and agrees the policies for managing each of these risks and they have remained unchanged since 2015.

Capital management
The Group defines the capital that it manages as its total equity and net debt balances. The Group manages its capital structure in light of 
current economic conditions and its strategic objectives to ensure that it is able to continue as a going concern whilst maximising the return 
to stakeholders through the optimisation of debt and equity balances.

The Group manages its medium-term bank debt to ensure continuity of funding and the policy is to arrange funding ahead of requirements 
and to maintain sufficient undrawn committed facilities. A key objective is to ensure compliance with the covenants set out in the Group’s 
bank facility agreements.

From time to time the Group purchases its own shares on the market; the timing of these purchases depends on market prices. Primarily 
the shares are intended to be used for issuing shares under the Group’s incentive schemes. Buy and sell decisions are made on a specific 
transaction basis by the Board.

There has been no change in the objectives, policies or processes with regard to capital management during the years ended 31 December 2016 
and 31 December 2015.

102

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201617 Financial instruments continued
Financial risks
The Group has exposure to a number of financial risks through the conduct of its operations. Risk management is governed by the Group’s 
operational policies, guidelines and authorisation procedures, which are outlined in the Strategic Report on pages 20 to 24. The key financial 
risks resulting from financial instruments are liquidity risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, foreign currency risk and pricing risk.

In managing interest rate and currency risks the Group aims to reduce the impact of short-term fluctuations on the Group’s earnings. 
Over the longer term, however, permanent changes in foreign exchange and interest rates would have an impact on consolidated earnings. 
For instance, a weakening of Pound Sterling on the foreign currency market would increase the cost of certain raw materials, whereas a 
strengthening would have the opposite effect.

(a) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Board is responsible for ensuring 
that the Group has sufficient liquidity to meet its financial liabilities as they fall due and does so by monitoring cash flow forecasts and budgets. 
Cash resources are largely and normally generated through operations and short-term flexibility is achieved by bank facilities. Bank debt is 
raised centrally and the Group aims to maintain a balance between flexibility and continuity of funding by having a range of maturities on its 
borrowings. Details of the Group borrowing facilities are provided on page 106.

(b) Interest rate risk
The Group’s policy is to review regularly the terms of its available short-term borrowing facilities and to assess individually and manage each 
long-term borrowing commitment accordingly. The Group borrows principally at floating rates of interest and, where appropriate, uses interest 
rate swaps to generate the desired interest rate profile, thereby managing the Group’s exposure to interest rate fluctuations.

Approximately 60 to 70 per cent of core debt is covered by interest rate swaps of varying maturities up until 2018, which reflects the maturity 
date of the related loans and medium-term requirements, in accordance with Group policy. The Group classifies its interest rate swaps as cash 
flow hedges and states them at fair value. The fair value of interest rate swaps is a £49,000 liability (2015: £77,000 liability) and is adjusted 
against the hedging reserve on an ongoing basis. 

The period that the swaps cover is matched against the debt maturity in order to fix the impact on the Income Statement. During the year £nil 
(2015: £144,000) has been recognised in other comprehensive income for the year with £75,000 (2015: £109,000) being reclassified from equity 
to the Income Statement. The interest rate swaps have been fully effective in the period.

With the addition of the fuel hedges (Note 17(e)) and forward contracts this gives a total of £1,123,000 (2015: £940,000) recognised in other 
comprehensive income for the year with £1,681,000 (2015: £1,984,000) being reclassified from equity to the Income Statement.

Sensitivity analysis
A change of 100 basis points in interest rates at the balance sheet date would have decreased equity and profit by the amounts shown below. 
The sensitivity analysis has been undertaken before the effect of tax. The sensitivity analysis of the Group’s exposure to interest rate risk has 
been determined based on the change taking place at the beginning of the financial year and held constant throughout the reporting period. 

This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain constant and considers the effect of financial 
instruments with variable interest rates, financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss or available for sale with fixed interest rates 
and the fixed rate element of interest rate swaps. The analysis was performed on the same basis for 2015.

Increase of 100 basis points

Decrease of 100 basis points

2016
£’000

(185)

185

2015
£’000

(349)

349

103

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

17 Financial instruments continued
Financial risks continued
(c) Credit risk
Management has a credit policy in place and the exposure to credit risk is monitored on an ongoing basis. Credit evaluations are performed 
on all customers requiring credit over a certain amount and, where appropriate, credit insurance cover is obtained. This provides excellent 
intelligence to minimise the number and value of bad debts and ultimately provides compensation if bad debts are incurred. An ageing 
of trade receivables is shown in Note 13 on page 101.

Investments are allowed only in liquid securities and only with counterparties that have a credit rating equal to or better than the Group. 
Transactions involving derivative financial instruments are with counterparties with whom the Group has a signed netting agreement as 
well as sound credit ratings. Given their high credit ratings, management does not expect any counterparty to fail to meet its obligations.

At the balance sheet date there were no significant concentrations of credit risk. The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by 
the carrying amount of each financial asset, including derivative financial instruments, in the balance sheet.

(d) Foreign currency risk
The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk on sales and purchases that are denominated in a currency other than Sterling. The currencies 
giving rise to this risk are primarily Euros and US Dollars.

The Group’s policy is to cover all significant foreign currency commitments in respect of trade receivables and trade payables by using 
forward foreign currency contracts. All the forward exchange contracts have maturities of less than 1 year after the balance sheet date. 
Where necessary, the forward exchange contracts are rolled over at maturity.

The Group classifies its forward exchange contracts as cash flow hedges and states them at fair value. The fair value of forward exchange 
contracts is £30,000 asset (2015: £19,000 liability) and is adjusted against the hedging reserve on an ongoing basis. At 31 December 2016 
all outstanding forward exchange contracts had a maturity date within 6 months.

The foreign currency profile of monetary items was:

2016

2015

Sterling
£’000

Euro US Dollar
£’000
£’000

AED
£’000

Total
£’000

Sterling
£’000

Euro
£’000

US Dollar
£’000

AED
£’000

Total
£’000

Cash and cash equivalents

16,733

2,373

1,510

65 20,681

22,925

38,804

2,972

– (14,975)

357

–

– 42,133

35,341

– (14,975)

(20,000)

(16,125)

(28,333)

(8,014)

(258)

– (36,605)

(35,083)

2,743

(5,016)

1,164

2,549

901

211

–

Trade receivables

Secured bank loans

Trade payables

Forward exchange contracts

627

37

(7)

–

657

(2,110)

(23)

(16)

Balance sheet exposure

27,831 (17,607)

1,602

65 11,891

1,073

(9,692)

(3,920)

–

–

–

–

–

–

24,990

38,101

(36,125)

(37,356)

(2,149)

(12,539)

A 10 per cent strengthening and weakening of the following currencies against the Pound Sterling at 31 December 2016 would have 
increased / (decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This calculation assumes that the change occurred at the 
balance sheet date and had been applied to risk exposures existing at that date.

This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular other exchange rates and interest rates, remain constant. The analysis was 
performed on the same basis for 2015:

10 per cent strengthening of £ against €

10 per cent weakening of £ against €

10 per cent strengthening of £ against $

10 per cent weakening of £ against $

10 per cent strengthening of £ against Dhs

10 per cent weakening of £ against Dhs

2016
£’000

1,654

(1,654)

(157)

157

(23)

23

2015
£’000

1,045

(1,045)

462

(462)

–

–

(e) Pricing risks
Where appropriate the Group uses hedging instruments to mitigate the risks of significant forward price rises of fuel in relation to expected 
consumption. The current hedges held are in place until 31 December 2017. The Group classifies its fuel hedges as cash flow hedges and states 
them at fair value. The fair value of the fuel hedges is £676,000 asset (2015: £2,053,000 liability) and is adjusted against the hedging reserve on 
an ongoing basis. The period that the fuel hedges cover is matched against future expected purchases in order to fix the impact on the Income 
Statement. During the year £1,123,000 (2015: £796,000) has been recognised in other comprehensive income, with £1,606,000 (2015: £1,875,000) 
being reclassified from equity to the Income Statement. The fuel hedges have been fully effective in the period.

104

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201617 Financial instruments continued
Financial risks continued
(f) Other risks
Further information about the Group’s strategic and financial risks is contained in the Strategic Report on pages 20 to 24.

Effective interest rates and maturity of liabilities
At 31 December 2016 there were £293,000 (2015: £327,000) of Group borrowings on a fixed rate. Interest rate swaps have been taken out with 
the intention to fix the interest on approximately 60 to 70 per cent of the Group’s core debt. The interest rate profile of the financial liabilities was:

31 December 2016

Cash and cash equivalents (Note 14)

Bank loans

Finance lease liabilities

31 December 2015

Cash and cash equivalents (Note 14)

Bank loans

Finance lease liabilities

Fixed or
variable
rate

Effective
interest rate
%

Total
£’000

6 months
or less
£’000

6 – 12
months
£’000

1 – 2 years
£’000

2 – 5 years
£’000

More than
5 years
£’000

Variable

Variable

Fixed

1.50

1.50

10.0

(20,681)

(20,681)

14,975

293

–

–

(5,413)

(20,681)

–

–

34

34

–

10,048

35

–

4,927

109

10,083

5,036

–

–

115

115

Fixed or
variable
rate

Effective
interest rate
%

Total
£’000

6 months
or less
£’000

6 – 12
months
£’000

1 – 2 years
£’000

2 – 5 years
£’000

More than
5 years
£’000

Variable

Variable

Fixed

2.27

2.27

10.0

(24,990)

(24,990)

36,125

327

–

–

11,462

(24,990)

–

–

34

34

–

–

19,438

16,687

34

107

19,472

16,794

–

–

152

152

At 31 December the undiscounted outstanding contractual payments (including interest) of financial liabilities were as follows:

Fixed or
variable
rate

Carrying
value
£’000

Total
£’000

6 months
or less
£’000

6 – 12
months
£’000

1 – 2 years
£’000

2 – 5 years
£’000

More than
5 years
£’000

31 December 2016

Bank loans

Trade payables

Finance lease liabilities

Financial liabilities

31 December 2015

Bank loans

Trade payables

Finance lease liabilities

Financial liabilities

Variable

14,975

15,182

43

Variable

36,605

36,605

36,605

Fixed

Fixed

293

(657)

320

(624)

3

(416)

(208)

43

–

37

10,108

4,988

–

40

–

–

120

–

51,216

51,483

36,235

(128)

10,148

5,108

–

–

120

–

120

Fixed or
variable
rate

Carrying
value
£’000

Total
£’000

6 months
or less
£’000

6 – 12
months
£’000

1 – 2 years
£’000

2 – 5 years
£’000

More than
5 years
£’000

Variable

Variable

Fixed

Fixed

36,125

37,356

327

2,149

37,020

37,356

360

2,177

204

37,356

3

1,294

203

–

37

841

19,746

16,867

–

40

42

–

120

–

75,957

76,913

38,857

1,081

19,828

16,987

–

–

160

–

160

105

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

17 Financial instruments continued
Borrowing facilities
The total bank borrowing facilities at 31 December 2016 amounted to £95.0 million (2015: £95.0 million), of which £80.0 million (2015: £58.9 million) 
remained unutilised. There are additional seasonal bank working capital facilities of £10.0 million available between 1 February and 31 August each 
year. The undrawn facilities available at 31 December 2016, in respect of which all conditions precedent had been met, were as follows:

Committed:

Expiring in more than 2 years but not more than 5 years

Expiring in 1 year or less

Uncommitted:

Expiring in 1 year or less

2016
£’000

65,025

–

15,000

80,025

2015
£’000

43,875

–

15,000

58,875

On 16 August 2016, the Group renewed its short-term working capital facilities and reduced its seasonal working capital facility to £10.0 million. 
The Group also extended the maturity of each of its committed facilities by 12 months. The committed facilities are all revolving credit facilities 
with interest charged at variable rates based on LIBOR. The Group’s bank facilities continue to be aligned with the current strategy to ensure 
that headroom against available facilities remains at appropriate levels.

The maturity profile of borrowing facilities is structured to provide balanced, committed and phased medium-term debt. The current facilities 
are set out as follows:

Committed facilities:

Q3: 2021

Q3: 2020

Q3: 2019

Q3: 2018

On-demand facilities:

Available all year

Seasonal (February to August inclusive)

Facility
£’000

20,000

20,000

20,000

20,000

15,000

10,000

Cumulative
facility
£’000

20,000

40,000

60,000

80,000

95,000

105,000

Fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities
A comparison by category of the book values and fair values of the financial assets and liabilities of the Group at 31 December 2016 is shown below:

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Bank loans

Finance lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest rate swaps, forward contracts and fuel hedges

Financial instrument assets and liabilities – net

Non-financial instrument assets and liabilities – net

2016

2015

Book amount
£’000

Fair value
£’000

Book amount
£’000

46,033

20,681

(14,192)

(320)

(70,939)

657

46,033

20,681

(14,975)

(293)

(70,939)

657

(18,836)

235,957

217,121

40,690

24,990

(36,125)

(327)

(71,293)

(2,149)

(44,214)

236,932

192,718

Fair value
£’000

40,690

24,990

(34,906)

(360)

(71,293)

(2,149)

106

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201617 Financial instruments continued
Borrowing facilities continued
Estimation of fair values
The following summarises the major methods and assumptions used in estimating the fair values of financial instruments reflected in the table.

(a) Derivatives
Derivative contracts are either marked to market using listed market prices or by discounting the contractual forward price at the relevant rate 
and deducting the current spot rate. For interest rate swaps, broker quotes are used.

(b) Interest-bearing loans and borrowings
Fair value is calculated based on the expected future principal and interest cash flows discounted at the market rate of interest at the balance 
sheet date. 

(c) Finance lease liabilities
The fair value is estimated as the present value of future cash flows, discounted at market interest rates for homogeneous lease agreements. 
The estimated fair values reflect changes in interest rates.

(d) Trade and other receivables / payables
For receivables / payables with a remaining life of less than 1 year, the notional amount is deemed to reflect the fair value. All other 
receivables / payables are discounted to determine the fair value.

(e) Fair value hierarchy
The table below analyses financial instruments, measured at fair value, into a fair value hierarchy based on the valuation techniques used 
to determine fair value.

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) 

or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices).

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

31 December 2016

Derivative financial assets

31 December 2015

Derivative financial liabilities

Level 1
£’000

–

–

Level 2
£’000

657

(2,149)

Level 3
£’000

–

–

Total
£’000

657

(2,149)

18 Employee benefits
The Company sponsors a pension scheme for employees in the UK which incorporates a funded defined benefit pension section and a 
defined contribution section (the “Scheme”). The Scheme is administered within a trust which is legally separate from the Company. The 
Trustee Board is appointed by both the Company and the Scheme’s membership and acts in the interest of the Scheme and all relevant 
stakeholders, including the members and the Company. The Trustee is also responsible for the investment of the Scheme’s assets.

The defined benefit section of the Scheme, which closed to future service accrual on 30 June 2006, provides pension and lump sums to 
members on retirement and to dependants on death. Members of the defined benefit section became entitled to a deferred pension on 
closure. Members no longer pay contributions to the defined benefit section. Company contributions to the defined benefit section after 
this date are used to fund any deficit in the Scheme and the expenses associated with administering the Scheme, as determined by regular 
actuarial valuations.

The defined benefit section of the Scheme poses a number of risks to the Company, for example longevity risk, investment risk, interest rate 
risk, inflation risk and salary risk. The Trustee is aware of these risks and uses various techniques to control them. The Trustee has a number of 
internal control policies, including a risk register, which are in place to manage and monitor the various risks it faces. The Trustee’s investment 
strategy incorporates the use of liability-driven investments (“LDIs”) to minimise sensitivity of the actuarial funding position to movements 
in interest rates and inflation rates.

107

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

18 Employee benefits continued
The defined benefit section of the Scheme is subject to regular actuarial valuations, which are usually carried out every 3 years. The next 
actuarial valuation is expected to be carried out with an effective date of 5 April 2018. These actuarial valuations are carried out in accordance 
with the requirements of the Pensions Act 2004 and so include deliberate margins for prudence. This contrasts with these accounting 
disclosures which are determined using best estimate assumptions.

A formal actuarial valuation was carried out as at 5 April 2015. The results of that valuation have been projected to 31 December 2016 by 
a qualified independent actuary. The figures in the following disclosure were measured using the projected unit method.

During 2015 an exercise was carried out offering eligible defined benefit section members and current pensioners and dependants the option 
to commute small pensions for a cash lump sum representing the value of their benefits. This represents a settlement of benefits for members 
taking the option. The cash lump sums were determined by the Trustee on a best estimate basis after taking advice from the actuary.

The amounts recognised in the Consolidated Balance Sheet were as follows:

Present value of Scheme liabilities

Fair value of Scheme assets

Net amount recognised at year end (before any adjustments for deferred tax)

2016 
£’000

(355,793)

360,069

4,276

2015 
£’000

(298,812)

302,239

3,427

2014
£’000

(309,067)

312,516

3,449

The current and past service costs, settlements and curtailments, together with the net interest expense for the year, are included in the 
employee benefits expense in the Statement of Comprehensive Income. Remeasurements of the net defined benefit surplus are included 
in other comprehensive income.

Net interest expense recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement

Remeasurements of the net liability:

Return on scheme assets (excluding amount included in interest expense)

Loss / (gain) arising from changes in financial assumptions

Gain arising from changes in demographic assumptions

Experience (gain) / loss

(Credit) / charge recorded in other comprehensive income

Total defined benefit (credit) / charge  

2016
£’000

545

(59,979)

62,474

–

(3,889)

(1,394)

(849)

2015
£’000

506

14,164

(5,063)

(7,412)

2,177

3,866

4,372

108

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201618 Employee benefits continued
The principal actuarial assumptions used were:

Liability discount rate

Inflation assumption – RPI

Inflation assumption – CPI

Rate of increase in salaries

Revaluation of deferred pensions

Increases for pensions in payment:

CPI pension increases (maximum 5% p.a.)

CPI pension increases (maximum 5% p.a., minimum 3% p.a.)

CPI pension increases (maximum 3% p.a.)

Proportion of employees opting for early retirement

Proportion of employees commuting pension for cash

Mortality assumption – before retirement

Mortality assumption – after retirement (males)

Loading

Projection basis

Mortality assumption – after retirement (females)

Loading

Projection basis

Future expected lifetime of current pensioner at age 65:

Male aged 65 at year end

Female aged 65 at year end

Future expected lifetime of future pensioner at age 65:

Male aged 45 at year end

Female aged 45 at year end

2016
£’000

2.65%

3.20%

2.20%

n/a

2.20%

2.20%

3.10%

2.10%

0%

50.0%

Same as
post retirement

S2PMA tables

105%

Year of birth

CMI_2015 1.0%

S2PFA tables

105%

Year of birth

CMI_2015 1.0%

86.5

88.5

87.8

89.8

2015
£’000

3.70%

3.10%

2.10%

n/a

2.10%

2.10%

3.10%

2.00%

0%

50.0%

Same as
post retirement

S2PMA tables

105%

Year of birth

CMI_2015 1.0%

S2PFA tables

105%

Year of birth

CMI_2015 1.0%

86.5

88.5

87.7

89.8

109

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

18 Employee benefits continued
Changes in the present value of assets over the year

Fair value of assets at start of the year

Interest income

Return on assets (excluding amount included in net interest expense)

Assets distributed on settlement

Contributions from the employer

Benefits paid

Administration expenses

Fair value of assets at end of the year

Actual return on assets over the year

Changes in the present value of liabilities over the year

Liabilities at start of the year

Interest cost

Remeasurement losses / (gains):

Actuarial losses / (gains) arising from changes in financial assumptions

Actuarial gains arising from changes in demographic assumptions

Other experience (losses) / gains

Liabilities extinguished on settlements

Benefits paid

Liabilities at end of the year

The split of the Scheme’s liabilities by category of membership is as follows:

Deferred pensioners

Pensioners in payment

Average duration of the Scheme’s liabilities at the end of the year (in years)

2016
£’000

302,239

10,943

59,837

–

–

(12,291)

(659)

2015
£’000

312,516

11,120

(14,164)

(1,508)

4,350

(9,332)

(743)

360,069

302,239

70,922

(3,044)

2016
£’000

298,812

10,829

62,332

–

(3,889)

–

(12,291)

2015
£’000

309,067

10,930

(5,063)

(7,412)

2,177

(1,555)

(9,332)

355,793

298,812

2016
£’000

195,742

160,051

355,793

18

2015
£’000

154,905

143,907

298,812

18

110

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201618 Employee benefits continued
The major categories of Scheme assets are as follows:

Return-seeking assets

UK equities

Overseas equities

Other equity type investments

Total return-seeking assets

Other

Insured pensioners

Cash

Liability-driven investments

Total matching assets

Total market value of assets

2016
£’000

37,333

17,348

39,739

94,420

1,251

7,165

257,233

265,649

360,069

2015
£’000

30,928

14,863

39,827

85,618

1,183

711

214,727

216,621

302,239

The return-seeking assets and LDI assets have quoted prices in active markets. The valuation of the insured pensions has been taken as the 
value of the corresponding liabilities assessed using the assumptions set out above.

The Scheme has no investments in the Company or in property occupied by the Company.

The Company expects to pay no contributions to the defined benefit section of the Scheme during the year ended 31 December 2017.

Sensitivity of the liability value to changes in the principal assumptions
If the discount rate were 0.1 per cent higher (lower), the defined benefit section Scheme liabilities would decrease by approximately £6.6 million 
(increase by £6.7 million) if all the other assumptions remained unchanged.

If the inflation assumption were 0.1 per cent higher (lower), the Scheme liabilities would increase by £2.2 million (decrease by £2.1 million). 
In this calculation all assumptions related to the inflation assumption have been appropriately adjusted, that is salary, the deferred pension 
and pension in payment increases. The other assumptions remain unchanged.

If life expectancies were to increase (decrease) by 1 year, the Scheme liabilities would increase by £15.1 million (decrease by £16.5 million) 
if all the other assumptions remained unchanged.

Share-based payments
Marshalls plc 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)
The LTIP was replaced in 2014 by the Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”) and accordingly no further share-based payment awards were made 
during the year ended 31 December 2016 under the LTIP. The LTIP awards made in respect of the 2014 scheme year provide for the award of 
Performance Shares. Performance Shares may be awarded to participants without requiring a qualifying investment, and are subject to the 
achievement of a 3-year performance target. The awards lapse if the performance target is not met over the 3-year vesting period. Performance 
Share awards are dependent on an improvement in reported earnings per share and operating cash flow, each measured using IFRSs. The 
Remuneration Committee may exercise its discretion with regard to the effect of one-off items. Details of the performance criteria applicable 
to 2014 LTIP awards are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 46 to 65.

111

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

18 Employee benefits continued
Share-based payments continued
Marshalls plc 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) continued
The Performance Shares take the form of options which are settled by physical delivery of shares. The exercise price is £nil in relation to any of 
these grants and there is no entitlement to dividends during the vesting period. There are no market conditions associated with these instruments.

Equity settled awards granted to Directors of Marshalls plc

Equity settled awards granted to other employees

Outstanding at 1 January

Lapsed

Exercised

Outstanding at 31 December

Number of
instruments

222,124

115,676

341,559

14,120

Weighted average
share price at
date of grant
(pence per share)
2016

141

180

139

172

Number of
options
2016

1,647,146

(27,108)

(926,559)

693,479

Date of
grant

1 April 2014

2 October 2014

1 April 2014

29 April 2014

Weighted average
share price at
date of grant
(pence per share)
2015

137

137

115

141

Vesting
period

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

Number of
options
2015

3,770,513

(615,072)

(1,508,295)

1,647,146

None of the options were exercisable at 31 December 2016.

The fair value of services received in return for shares granted is measured by reference to the fair value of these awards at the date of grant. 
The estimate of the fair value of the services received is measured based on a Black-Scholes valuation model. 

Fair value at grant date (pence per share)

Share price on date of grant (pence per share)

Expected volatility used in the modelling under the Black-Scholes 
valuation model

Dividend yield

Risk-free interest rate (based on national Government bonds)

The Company’s share price at 31 December 2016 was 292.5 pence.

2 October
2014 grant

29 April
2014 grant

1 April
2014 grant

181

199

160

176

166

180

65.0%

65.0%

65.0%

3.0%

2.0%

3.0%

2.0%

3.0%

2.0%

The expected volatility is wholly based on the historic volatility, adjusted for any expected changes to future volatility due to publicly 
available information.

The total expenses recognised for the year arising from share-based payments are as follows:

Awards granted and total expense recognised as employee costs

2016
£’000

431

2015
£’000

710

Performance Incentive Plan (“PIP”)
The PIP was a 3-year incentive scheme introduced in 2011 which terminated in 2014. Deferred balances in the form of shares carried over 
from the final year of the PIP vested as share-based payment awards in March 2015 in accordance with the rules of the PIP. There were no 
outstanding awards under the PIP at 31 December 2016 or 31 December 2015.

112

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201618 Employee benefits continued
Share-based payments continued
Performance Incentive Plan (“PIP”) continued
Equity settled awards under the PIP are settled by physical delivery of shares.

Outstanding at 1 January

Granted

Change in value of notional shares

Element released

Outstanding at 31 December

2016

Value
£’000

Number of
options

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

The total expenses recognised for the year arising from share-based payments were as follows:

Awards granted and total expense recognised as employee costs

2015

Value
£’000

2,158

–

–

Number of
options

922,281

–

–

(2,158)

(922,281)

–

2016
£’000

–

–

2015
£’000

–

Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”)
Share-based payment awards have been made during the year in accordance with the rules of the MIP. Full details of the performance criteria 
and the basis of operation of the MIP are set out in the Annual Remuneration Report on pages 46 to 65.

Equity settled awards are settled by physical delivery of shares. The following equity settled awards have been granted:

Equity settled awards granted to Directors of Marshalls plc

Equity settled awards granted to other employees

Equity settled awards granted to Directors of Marshalls plc

Equity settled awards granted to other employees

Equity settled awards granted to Directors of Marshalls plc

Equity settled awards granted to other employees

Analysis of closing balance (deferred into shares):

Equity settled awards granted to Directors of Marshalls plc

Equity settled awards granted to former Directors of Marshalls plc

Equity settled awards granted to other employees

Outstanding at 1 January

Granted

Change in value of notional shares

Lapsed

Element released

Date of grant

Vesting period

Number of
instruments

298,390

348,338

370,952

478,419

405,293

537,492

2,438,884

£’000

873

1,019

1,086

1,399

1,185

1,572

7,134

11 April 2014

11 April 2014

10 March 2015

10 March 2015

11 March 2016

11 March 2016

2016

£’000

3,144

–

Shares

1,074,635

–

3,990

1,364,249

7,134

2,438,884

2015

£’000

2,254

189

3,061

5,504

2016

2015

Value
£’000

5,504

2,757

(106)

–

Number of
options

1,693,639

942,785

222,456

–

(1,021)

(419,996)

Value
£’000

3,344

2,839

415

(296)

(798)

4 years

4 years

3 years

3 years

2 years

2 years

Shares

693,585

58,224

941,830

1,693,639

Number of
options

1,429,056

873,699

(141,494)

(126,410)

(341,212)

Outstanding at 31 December

7,134

2,438,884

5,504

1,693,639

113

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

18 Employee benefits continued
Share-based payments continued
Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”) continued
The total expenses recognised for the period arising from share-based payments were as follows:

Awards granted and total expense recognised as employee costs

2016
£’000

3,428

2015
£’000

2,858

Further details in relation to the Directors are set out in the Annual Remuneration Report on pages 46 to 65. Included in the total expense of 
£3,428,000 (2015: £2,858,000) is an amount of £525,000 (2015: £1,187,000) which is expected to be settled as interim cash payments under the 
terms of the scheme and which has been included within wages and salaries in Note 3 and accruals in Note 15.

Employee Bonus Share Plan
A Bonus Share Plan was approved by shareholders in May 2015 under which a number of senior management employees were granted 
performance related bonuses with an element of this bonus being in the form of shares. The bonus performance criteria are the same as 
those applicable to the MIP awards and are in relation to the years ended 31 December 2016 and 31 December 2015. The bonus shares 
take the form of nil-cost options to acquire shares at the end of a 3-year vesting period from the date of grant, and vesting is conditional on 
continued employment at the end of the vesting period. Awards are made to participants following publication of the Group’s year-end results.  
Awards outstanding at 31 December 2016 were over 55,587 shares (31 December 2015: nil). The total expenses recognised for the year arising 
from share-based payments were £116,000 (2015: £54,000).

All-employee Sharesave (“SAYE”) scheme
On 5 October 2015 options were granted over 1,000,000 shares to employees who had subscribed to the SAYE scheme. The option price is 
291 pence, a discount of 20 per cent to the market price on the date of grant. The option is exercisable by relevant employees after a period 
of 3 years. The total expense recognised for the year arising from share-based payments was £300,000 (2015: £55,000).

Employee profit sharing scheme
At 31 December 2016 the scheme held 42,328 (2015: 42,370) Ordinary Shares in the Company.

19 Deferred taxation
Recognised deferred taxation assets and liabilities 

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Inventories

Employee benefits

Equity settled share-based payments

Other items

Tax assets / (liabilities)

Assets

2016
£’000

–

–

–

–

1,821

–

1,821

2015
£’000

–

–

–

–

1,316

–

1,316

Liabilities

2016
£’000

2015
£’000

(10,838)

(11,334)

(265)

(377)

(727)

–

(1,448)

(13,655)

(283)

(427)

(617)

–

(964)

(13,625)

The March 2016 Budget announced that the UK corporation tax rate will reduce to 17 per cent by 2020. Reductions in the rate to 19 per cent 
(effective April 2017) and 17 per cent (effective April 2020) were substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. This will reduce the Group’s 
future current tax charge accordingly. The deferred taxation liability at 31 December 2016 has been calculated based on the rate at which the 
deferred tax is expected to unwind in the future using rates enacted at the balance sheet date.

The deferred taxation liability of £727,000 (2015: £617,000) in relation to employee benefits is in respect of the net surplus for the defined 
benefit obligations of £4,276,000 (2015: £3,427,000 net surplus) (Note 18) calculated at 17 per cent (2015: 18 per cent).

Deferred tax assets on capital losses and overseas trading losses have not been recognised due to uncertainty around the future use of the losses.

114

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201619 Deferred taxation continued
Movement in temporary differences
Year ended 31 December 2016

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Inventories

Employee benefits

Equity settled share-based payments

Other items

Year ended 31 December 2015

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Inventories

Employee benefits

Equity settled share-based payments

Impact on other comprehensive income of the 
change in rate of deferred tax

Other items

1 January
2016
£’000

(11,334)

(283)

(427)

(617)

1,316

(964)

Recognised
in income
£’000

Recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
£’000

Recognised
in statement
of changes
in equity
£’000

496

18

50

127

383

77

–

–

–

(237)

–

(561)

(798)

–

–

–

–

122

–

122

(12,309)

1,151

1 January
2015
£’000

(12,934)

(315)

(450)

(690)

1,394

367

(944)

(13,572)

Recognised
in income
£’000

Recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
£’000

Recognised
in statement
of changes
in equity
£’000

1,600

32

23

(700)

(73)

–

184

1,066

–

–

–

773

–

(375)

(209)

189

–

–

–

–

(5)

8

5

8

31 December
2016
£’000

(10,838)

(265)

(377)

(727)

1,821

(1,448)

(11,834)

31 December
2015
£’000

(11,334)

(283)

(427)

(617)

1,316

–

(964)

(12,309)

Deferred taxation liabilities represent sums that might become payable as tax in future years as a result of transactions that have occurred 
in the current year. The explanation as to why such liabilities may arise is included in the notes to the tax reconciliation (Note 6).

The deferred tax balances on short-term timing differences are expected to reverse within 1 to 3 years.

Based on the current investment programme of the Group and assuming that current rates of capital allowances on fixed asset expenditure 
continue into the future, there is little prospect of any significant part of the deferred taxation liability of the Company becoming payable 
over the next 3 years. It is not realistic to make any projection after a 3-year period.

The deferred tax liabilities disclosed in the year ended 31 December 2016 include the deferred tax relating to the Group’s pension scheme 
assets. Deferred tax assets on capital losses and overseas trading losses have not been recognised due to uncertainty around the future use 
of the losses.

115

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

20 Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital

At 1 January and at 31 December

Number of 25 pence Ordinary Shares

Issued and paid up

2016
£’000

49,845

2015
£’000

49,845

199,378,755

199,378,755

Consolidation reserve
On 8 July 2004 Marshalls plc was introduced as the new holding company of the Group by way of a court-approved Scheme of Arrangement 
under Section 425 of the Companies Act 1985. The restructuring was accounted for as a capital reorganisation and accounting principles 
were applied as if the Company had always been the holding company of the Group. The difference between the aggregate nominal value 
of the new shares issued by the Company and the called-up share capital, capital redemption reserve and share premium account of 
Marshalls Group plc (the previous holding company) was transferred to a consolidation reserve.

Hedging reserve
This represents the gains and losses arising on derivatives used for cash flow hedging, principally from the Group’s interest rate swaps, energy 
price contracts and forward exchange contracts.

Dividends
After the balance sheet date the following dividends were proposed by the Directors. The dividends have not been provided and there were 
no income tax consequences.

5.80 pence final dividend (2015: 4.75 pence) per Ordinary Share

3.00 pence supplementary dividend (2015: 2.00 pence) per Ordinary Share

21 Non-controlling interests

At 1 January

Share of profit / (loss) for the year

Foreign currency transaction differences

At 31 December

22 Analysis of net debt

Cash at bank and in hand

Debt due after 1 year

Finance leases

2016
£’000

11,440

5,917

17,357

2016
£’000

1,139

157

169

1,465

Other
changes
£’000

371

(2,641)

(6)

(2,276)

2015
£’000

9,470

3,988

13,458

2015
£’000

1,475

(258)

(78)

1,139

31 December
2016
£’000

20,681

(14,975)

(293)

5,413

1 January
2016
£’000

24,990

(36,125)

(327)

(11,462)

Cash flow
£’000

(4,680)

23,791

40

19,151

116

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201622 Analysis of net debt continued
Reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net debt

Net (decrease) / increase in cash equivalents

Cash outflow from decrease in debt and lease financing

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations

Movement in net debt in the year

Net debt at 1 January

Net debt at 31 December

2016
£’000

(4,680)

23,831

(2,276)

16,875

(11,462)

5,413

2015
£’000

4,679

13,350

989

19,018

(30,480)

(11,462)

23 Operating leases 
The Group had non-cancellable minimum lease payments to be paid in respect of operating leases on property, plant, machinery and vehicles 
as follows:

31 December 2016

Expiring:

Within 1 year

Between 1 and 5 years

In more than 5 years

31 December 2015

Expiring:

Within 1 year

Between 1 and 5 years

In more than 5 years

Total
£’000

1,185

33,973

35,838

70,996

Total
£’000

336

21,833

51,857

74,026

6 months
or less
£’000

1,021

5,577

1,203

7,801

6 months
or less
£’000

277

3,768

2,767

6,812

6 – 12
months
£’000

164

5,549

1,197

6,910

6 – 12
months
£’000

59

3,748

2,751

6,558

1 – 2 years
£’000

2 – 5 years
£’000

–

9,704

2,471

12,175

–

13,140

8,759

21,899

1 – 2 years
£’000

2 – 5 years
£’000

–

6,855

5,526

12,381

–

7,462

16,740

24,202

More than
5 years
£’000

–

3

22,208

22,211

More than
5 years
£’000

–

–

24,073

24,073

The minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases (above) comprise property of £27,606,000 (2015: £28,482,000) and 
plant, machinery and vehicles of £43,390,000 (2015: £45,544,000).

Certain leased properties have been sublet by the Group. Sublease payments of £200,020 (2015: £89,663) are expected to be received during 
the following financial year. An amount of £246,186 (2015: £160,110) was recognised as income in the Consolidated Income Statement within 
net operating costs in respect of subleases.

117

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – continued

24 Contingencies
Royal Bank of Scotland plc has issued, on behalf of Marshalls plc, the following irrevocable letters of credit relating to the Group’s cap 
on self insurance for employer’s liability and vehicle insurance:

Beneficiary

Amount

Period

Purpose

Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance (London Management) Limited

Aviva Insurance Limited

M S Amlin Limited 

£700,000

£350,000

£350,000

23 Dec 2011 to 30 Oct 2017

Employer’s liability

19 Mar 2014 to 29 Oct 2017

Vehicle insurance

30 Oct 2016 to 30 Oct 2018

Vehicle insurance

25 Related parties
Identity of related parties
The Group has a related party relationship with its Directors.

Transactions with key management personnel
Other than the Directors, there are no senior managers in the Group who are relevant for establishing that Marshalls has the appropriate 
expertise and experience for the management of its business.

Directors of the Company and their immediate relatives control 0.0881 per cent (2015: 0.0135 per cent) of the voting shares of the Company. 

In addition to their salaries and pension allowances, the Group also provides non-cash benefits to Directors. Further details in relation to 
Directors are disclosed in the Annual Remuneration Report on pages 46 to 65.

26 Accounting estimates and judgements
Management discussed with the Audit Committee the development, selection and disclosure of the Group’s critical accounting policies and 
estimates and the application of these policies and estimates. The accounting policies are set out in Note 1 on pages 84 to 92. As stated in the 
accounting policies revenue is disclosed net of rebates. Whilst the Directors do not regard the determination of accruals for rebates as a key 
area of estimation uncertainty, the estimation of appropriate accruals for rebates requires commercial assessment. Note 12 contains details of 
the Group’s inventory. Whilst not considered by the Directors to be a key source of estimation uncertainty, the carrying value of the Group’s 
finished goods inventory has been reviewed using commercial judgement with regard to the assessment of the appropriate level of 
provisioning against inventory obsolescence and for net realisable value.

Other significant accounting judgements applied in the preparation of the Financial Statements are:

(a) 

 Note 2 contains information about the assumptions and judgements made relating to the identification of operating segments for the 
Group as defined in IFRS 8 “Operating Segments”.

(b)   Note 18 contains information about the principal actuarial assumptions used in the determination of defined benefit pension obligations. 

These key assumptions include discount rates, the expected return on net assets, inflation rates and mortality rates and have been 
determined following advice received from an independent qualified actuary. Sensitivity analysis is disclosed in Note 18 on page 111.

118

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Parent Company Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 December 2016

Current year

At 1 January 2016

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

Own 
shares
£’000

Capital
redemption
reserve
£’000

Equity
reserve
£’000

Retained
earnings
£’000

Total
equity
£’000

49,845

22,695

(5,529)

75,394

4,122

144,836

291,363

Total comprehensive expense for the year

Loss for the financial year

Total comprehensive expense for the year

Transactions with owners, recorded directly in equity

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Share-based payments

Deferred tax on share-based payments

Dividends to equity shareholders

Purchase of own shares

Disposal of own shares

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

Total transactions with owners of the Company

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(1,175)

3,082

1,907

1,907

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(6,030)

(6,030)

(6,030)

(6,030)

1,195

1,389

2,584

60

–

–

–

–

60

(19,034)

(19,034)

–

(1,175)

(3,082)

–

1,255

(20,727)

(17,565)

1,255

(26,757)

(23,595)

At 31 December 2016

49,845

22,695

(3,622)

75,394

5,377

118,079

267,768

There were no items of other comprehensive income / (expense) in the year other than the loss for the financial year recorded above.

Prior year

At 1 January 2015

Total comprehensive expense for the year

Loss for the financial year

Total comprehensive expense for the year

Transactions with owners, recorded directly 
in equity

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Share-based payments

Deferred tax on share-based payments

Dividends to equity shareholders

Purchase of own shares

Disposal of own shares

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

Total transactions with owners of the Company

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

Own 
shares
£’000

Capital
redemption
reserve
£’000

Equity
reserve
£’000

Retained
earnings
£’000

Total
equity
£’000

49,845

22,695

(6,689)

75,394

2,765

166,436

310,446

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(4,582)

5,742

1,160

1,160

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(4,410)

(4,410)

(4,410)

(4,410)

1,359

(2)

–

–

–

1,357

1,357

843

–

2,202

(2)

(12,291)

(12,291)

–

(4,582)

(5,742)

–

(17,190)

(14,673)

(21,600)

(19,083)

At 31 December 2015

49,845

22,695

(5,529)

75,394

4,122

144,836

291,363

There were no items of other comprehensive income / (expense) in the year other than the loss for the financial year recorded above.

119

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCompany Balance Sheet
at 31 December 2016

Fixed assets

Investments

Deferred taxation assets

Current assets

Debtors

Current liabilities

Creditors

Net current liabilities

Net assets

Capital and reserves

Called-up share capital

Share premium account

Own shares

Capital redemption reserve

Equity reserve

Profit and loss account

Equity shareholders’ funds

Approved at a Directors’ meeting on 15 March 2017.

On behalf of the Board:

Martyn Coffey 
Chief Executive 

Jack Clarke
Finance Director

The Notes on pages 121 to 126 form part of these Company Financial Statements.

Notes

2016
£’000

2015
£’000

30

31

32

33

34

343,507

1,010

344,517

342,312

698

343,010

1,257

1,182

(78,006)

(76,749)

267,768

49,845

22,695

(3,622)

75,394

5,377

118,079

267,768

(52,829)

(51,647)

291,363

49,845

22,695

(5,529)

75,394

4,122

144,836

291,363

120

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

27 Accounting policies
The following paragraphs summarise the main accounting policies of the Company, which have been applied consistently in dealing with 
items which are considered material in relation to the Company’s Financial Statements. The Company is exempt from the requirement to give 
its own disclosures as the entity forms part of the Consolidated Financial Statements of Marshalls plc, which has included disclosures under 
IFRS 7 “Financial Instruments: Disclosures”.

(a) Authorisation of Financial Statements and Statement of Compliance with FRS 101
The Parent Company Financial Statements of Marshalls plc for the year ended 31 December 2016 were authorised for issue by the Board of 
Directors on 15 March 2017. Marshalls plc is a public limited company that is incorporated, domiciled and has its registered office in England 
and Wales. The Company’s Ordinary Shares are publicly traded on the London Stock Exchange and the Company is not under the control 
of any single shareholder.

These Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (“FRS 101”).

No profit or loss is presented by the Company as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.

(b) Basis of preparation
The Company has adopted FRS 101 from the UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice for all periods presented.

The accounting policies which follow set out those policies which apply in preparing the Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2016.

In these Financial Statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures:

•  the requirements of paragraphs 45(b) and 46 – 52 of IFRS 2 “Share-based Payments”;

•  the requirement of IFRS 7 “Financial Instruments: Disclosures”;

•  the requirement of paragraphs 91 – 99 of IFRS 13 “Fair Value Measurement”;

•  the requirement in paragraph 38 of IAS 1 “Presentation of Financial Statements” to present comparative information in respect of: paragraph 

79(a)(iv) of IAS 1;

•  the requirements of paragraphs 10(d), 10(f ), 16, 39(c), 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, 111 and 134 – 136 of IAS 1 “Presentation of Financial Statements”;

•  the requirements of IAS 7 “Statement of Cash Flows”;

•  the requirements of paragraphs 30 and 31 of IAS 8 “Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors”;

•  the requirements of paragraph 17 of IAS 24 “Related Party Disclosures”;

•  the requirements in IAS 24 “Related Party Disclosures” to disclose related party transactions entered into between 2 or more members 

of a group, provided that any subsidiary which is a party to the transaction is wholly owned by such a member; and

•  the requirements of paragraphs 134(d) – 134(f ) and 135(c) – 135(e) of IAS 36 “Impairment of Assets”.

The Company also intends to take advantage of these exemptions in the financial statements to be issued in the following year. Objections 
may be served in the Company by shareholders holding in aggregate 5 per cent or more of the total allocated shares in the Company. 
Where required, additional disclosures are given in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(c) Investments
Fixed asset investments in subsidiaries and associates are shown at cost less provision for impairment. The Directors consider annually whether 
a provision against the value of investments on an individual basis is required. 

(d) Share capital
(i) Share capital
Share capital is classified as equity if it is non-redeemable and any dividends are discretionary, or if it is redeemable but only at the Company’s 
option. Dividends on share capital classified as equity are recognised as distributions within equity. Non-equity share capital is classified as a 
liability if it is redeemable on a specific date or at the option of the shareholders or if dividend payments are not discretionary. Dividends 
thereon are recognised in the Income Statement as a financial expense.

(ii) Dividends 
Dividends on non-equity shares are recognised as a liability and accounted for on an accruals basis. Equity dividends are recognised 
as a liability in the period in which they are declared (appropriately authorised and no longer at the discretion of the Company).

121

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Company Financial Statements – continued

27 Accounting policies continued
(e) Pension schemes
(i) Defined benefit scheme 
The Company participates in a Group-wide pension scheme providing benefits based on final pensionable pay. The defined benefit section 
of the scheme was closed to future service accrual in July 2006.

The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of the Company. The defined benefit cost and contributions payable are borne by 
Marshalls Group Limited and, therefore, the defined benefit surplus or deficit is recorded in Marshalls Group Limited. Full details are provided 
in Note 18 on pages 107 to 111.

(ii) Defined contribution scheme
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution schemes are recognised as an expense as incurred.

(f) Share-based payment transactions
The Company enters into equity settled share-based payment transactions with its employees. In particular, annual awards are made to 
employees under the Company’s Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”) and, in previous years, the Performance Incentive Plan (“PIP”) and the 
2005 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”).

These schemes allow employees to acquire shares in Marshalls plc. The fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense 
with a corresponding increase in equity. The fair value is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the employees 
become unconditionally entitled to the options. Where appropriate, the fair value of the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes 
option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The amount recognised as an 
expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to 
be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and 
non-market performance conditions at the vesting date.

Current tax relief is available as shares vest based on the value at the date of vesting. A deferred tax asset is recognised at grant date based on 
the number of shares expected to be issued, at the value at which they are expected to be issued, proportioned in line with the vesting period.

(g) Own shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust
Transactions of the Company-sponsored Employee Benefit Trust are included in the Group Financial Statements. In particular, the Trust’s 
purchases of shares in the Company are debited directly to equity.

(h) Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at nominal amount (discounted if material).

(i) Income tax
Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred taxation. Income tax is recognised in the Income Statement except 
to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity, in which case it is recognised in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred taxation is provided using the balance sheet liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not 
provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill, the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, 
other than in a business combination, and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in 
the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred taxation provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying 
amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates that are expected to apply when the temporary difference reverses, based on rates that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

A deferred taxation asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset 
can be utilised. Deferred taxation assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realised. 

Additional income taxes that arise from the distribution of dividends are recognised at the same time as the liability to pay the related dividend.

122

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201628 Operating costs
The audit fee for the Company was £20,000 (2015: £20,000). This is in respect of the audit of the Financial Statements. Fees paid to the 
Company’s auditor for services other than the statutory audit of the Company are not disclosed in the Notes to the Company Financial 
Statements since the consolidated accounts of the Group are required to disclose non-audit fees on a consolidated basis.

Details of Directors’ remuneration, share options, long-term incentive plans and Directors’ pension entitlements are disclosed on pages 46 to 65 
of the Annual Remuneration Report.

29 Ordinary dividends: equity shares

2015 final: paid 8 July 2016

2015 supplementary: paid 8 July 2016

2016 interim: paid 6 December 2016

2016

2015

Pence per share

£’000

Pence per share

4.75

2.00

2.90

9.65

9,369

3,945

5,720

19,034

4.00

–

2.25

6.25

£’000

7,866

–

4,425

12,291

After the balance sheet date the following dividends were proposed by the Directors. The dividends have not been provided and there were 
no income tax consequences.

2016 final: 5.80 pence (2015: 4.75 pence) per Ordinary Share

2016 supplementary: 3.00 pence (2015: 2.00 pence) per Ordinary Share

30 Investments

At 1 January 2016

Additions

At 31 December 2016

2016
£’000

11,440

5,917

17,357

2015
£’000

9,470

3,988

13,458

£’000

342,312

1,195

343,507

Investments comprise shares in the subsidiary undertaking, Marshalls Group Limited. The Directors have considered the carrying value of the 
Company’s investments and are satisfied that no provision is required.

The increase in the year of £1,195 represents adjustments to the number of shares expected to vest in respect of share-based payment awards 
granted to employees of Marshalls Group Limited.

Pursuant to Sections 409 and 410(2) of the Companies Act 2006, the principal subsidiary undertakings of Marshalls plc at 31 December 2016 
are set out below. With the exception of Marshalls NV, Xiamen Marshalls Import Export Company Limited, Marshalls Landscape Products 
(North America) Inc. and Marshalls Landscape Products FZE, all the companies operate within the United Kingdom and are registered 
in England and Wales. Marshalls NV is registered in Belgium. Xiamen Marshalls Import Export Company Limited is registered in China, 
Marshalls Landscape Products (North America) Inc. is registered in the USA and Marshalls Landscape Products FZE is registered in Dubai.

Subsidiaries

Alton Glasshouses Limited

Bollards Direct Limited

Capability Brown Garden Centres Limited

Capability Brown Landscaping Limited

Classical Flagstones Limited

Dalestone Concrete Products Limited

Locharbriggs Sandstone Limited

Lloyds Quarries Limited

Marshalls Building Materials Limited

Marshalls Building Products Limited

Marshalls Concrete Products Limited

Principal activities

Class of share

% ownership

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Property management

Non-trading

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

123

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPrincipal activities

Class of share

% ownership

Notes to the Company Financial Statements – continued

30 Investments continued
Subsidiaries

Marshalls Directors Limited

Marshalls Dormant No. 30 Limited

Marshalls Dormant No. 31 Limited

Marshalls EBT Limited*

Marshalls Estates Limited

Marshalls Group Limited*

Marshalls Landscape Products Limited

Marshalls Landscape Products FZE 

Marshalls Landscape Products (North America) Inc.

Marshalls Mono Limited

Marshalls Natural Stone Limited

Marshalls NV

Marshalls Profit Sharing Scheme Limited

Marshalls Properties Limited

Marshalls Register Limited

Marshalls Stone Products Limited

Marshalls Street Furniture Limited

Ollerton Limited

Panablok (UK) Limited

Paver Systems (Carluke) Limited

Paver Systems Limited

Premier Mortars Limited

Quarryfill Limited

Rhino Protec Limited

Robinson Associates Stone Consultants Limited

Robinsons Greenhouses Limited

Rockrite Limited

S Marshall & Sons Limited

Scenic Blue Limited

Scenic Blue Landscape Franchise Limited

Scenic Blue (UK) Limited

Stancliffe Stone Company Limited

Stoke Hall Quarry Limited*

Stone Shippers Limited

Stonemarket (Concrete) Limited

Stonemarket Limited

The Great British Bollard Company Limited

The Stancliffe Group Limited

The Yorkshire Brick Co. Limited

Town & Country Paving Limited

Urban Engineering Limited

Woodhouse Group Limited

Woodhouse UK Limited

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Intermediate holding company

Non-trading

Landscape products supplier

Landscape products supplier

Landscape products manufacturer and supplier and 
quarry owner supplying a wide variety of paving, 
street furniture and natural stone products

Landscape products manufacturer and supplier

Non-trading

Non-trading

Property management

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

66.7

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Xiamen Marshalls Import Export Company Limited

Sourcing and distribution of natural stone products

* Held by Marshalls plc. All others held by subsidiary undertakings.

Marshalls NV is largely dependent on the continued support of Marshalls Mono Limited, which has indicated that it intends to continue 
providing this support for the foreseeable future.

124

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 201631 Deferred taxation
Recognised deferred taxation assets and liabilities

Equity settled share-based payments

Movement in temporary differences

Equity settled share-based payments

32 Debtors

Corporation tax

No debtors were due after more than 1 year.

33 Creditors

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings

Assets

2016
£’000

1,010

1 January
2016
£’000

698

2015
£’000

698

Liabilities

2016
£’000

–

2015
£’000

–

Recognised
in income
£’000

252

Recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
£’000

31 December
2016
£’000

60

1,010

2016
£’000

1,257

2016
£’000

78,006

2015
£’000

1,182

2015
£’000

52,829

34 Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital
As at 31 December 2016, the issued and fully paid up share capital was as follows:

Issued and paid up

2016
Number

2016 nominal
value
£’000

2015
Number

2015 nominal
value
£’000

At 31 December

199,378,755

49,845

199,378,755

49,845

Equity reserve
The equity reserve represents the number of shares expected to vest in respect of share-based payment awards granted to employees 
of the Company.

35 Capital and leasing commitments
The Company had no capital or leasing commitments at 31 December 2016 or 31 December 2015.

36 Bank facilities
The Group’s banking arrangements are in respect of Marshalls plc, Marshalls Group Limited and Marshalls Mono Limited with each company 
being nominated borrowers. The operational banking activities of the Group are undertaken by Marshalls Group Limited and the Group’s bank 
debt is largely included in Marshalls Group Limited’s balance sheet.

125

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Company Financial Statements – continued

37 Contingent liabilities
Royal Bank of Scotland plc has issued, on behalf of Marshalls plc, the following irrevocable letters of credit relating to the Group’s cap on 
self insurance for employer’s liability and vehicle insurance.

Beneficiary

Amount

Period

Purpose

Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance (London Management) Limited

Aviva Insurance Limited

M S Amlin Limited

£700,000

£350,000

£350,000

23 Dec 2011 to 30 Oct 2017

Employer’s liability

19 Mar 2014 to 29 Oct 2029

Vehicle insurance

30 Oct 2016 to 30 Oct 2018

Vehicle insurance

38 Pension scheme
The Company is the sponsoring employer of the Marshalls plc pension scheme (the “Scheme”) which has both a defined benefit and a defined 
contribution section. The assets of the Scheme are held in separately managed funds which are independent of the Group’s finances. 

Full details of the Scheme are provided in Note 18. The Company is unable to identify its share of the Scheme assets and liabilities on 
a consistent and reasonable basis.

The latest funding valuation of the defined benefit section of the Scheme was carried out as at 5 April 2015 and was updated for the purposes 
of the 31 December 2016 Financial Statements by a qualified independent actuary. Active employees are members of the defined contribution 
section of the Scheme, which invests funds in which the contributions for each individual member are separately identifiable and the benefits 
calculated accordingly.

39 Accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of the Financial Statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions. Although these 
judgements and estimates are based on management’s best knowledge, actual results ultimately may differ from these estimates.

The key sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant risk of causing material adjustments to the carrying value of assets and 
liabilities within the next financial year are disclosed below.

Note 18 contains information about the principal actuarial assumptions used in the determination of defined benefit pension obligations. 
These key assumptions include discount rates, the expected return on net assets, inflation rates and mortality rates and have been determined 
following advice received from an independent qualified actuary. Sensitivity analysis is disclosed in Note 18 on page 111.

Note 31 contains details of the Company’s deferred taxation. Liabilities recognised are determined by reference to the likelihood of settlement 
and the likelihood that assets are received is based on assumptions of future actions.

40 Related parties
Related party relationships exist with other members of the Group. All operating costs are borne by Marshalls Group Limited and are recharged 
to Marshalls plc in respect of specifically attributable costs. All related party transactions were made on terms equivalent to those that prevail 
in arm’s length transactions.

126

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Financial History – Consolidated Group

Consolidated Income Statement 

Revenue

Net operating costs

Operating profit (before operational restructuring 
and works closure costs, goodwill and intangible 
asset impairments)

Operational restructuring and works closure costs, 
goodwill and intangible asset impairments

Operating (loss) / profit

Financial income and expenses (net)

Profit before tax (before operational restructuring 
and works closure costs, goodwill and intangible 
asset impairments)

(Loss) / profit before tax

Income tax credit / (expense)

(Loss) / profit for the financial year before post-tax 
(loss) / profit of discontinued operations

Post-tax profit of discontinued operations

(Loss) / profit for the financial year

(Loss) / profit for the year attributable to:

Equity shareholders of the Parent

Non-controlling interests

EBITA***

EBITDA***

EBITA before operational restructuring and 
works closure costs, goodwill and intangible 
asset impairments

EBITDA before operational restructuring and 
works closure costs, goodwill and intangible 
asset impairments

Earnings per share (pence):

Basic (continuing operations)

Basic (total operations)

Basic continuing operations (before operational 
restructuring and works closure costs, goodwill and 
intangible asset impairments)

Dividends per share (pence) – IFRS

Dividend cover (times) – IFRS (continuing)

Dividends per share (pence) – traditional

Dividends per share (pence) – supplementary 

Dividend cover (times) – traditional (continuing)

Year-end share price (pence)

Tax rate (%)

Year to

31 December 2012**

£’000

Year to
31 December 2013*
£’000

Year to
31 December 2014
£’000

Year to
31 December 2015
£’000

Year to
31 December 2016
£’000

300,938

(288,087)

307,390

(291,300)

358,516

(333,211)

386,204

(348,752)

396,922

(349,283)

12,851

16,090

25,305

37,452

47,639

(21,521)

(8,670)

(3,578)

9,273

(12,248)

5,874

(6,374)

676

(5,698)

(5,684)

(14)

(5,698)

(7,423)

6,538

–

16,090

(3,064)

13,026

13,026

(67)

12,959

503

13,462

14,096

(634)

13,462

17,028

30,227

–

25,305

(2,884)

22,421

22,421

(4,198)

18,223

–

18,223

19,857

(1,634)

18,223

26,536

38,518

–

37,452

(2,174)

35,278

35,278

(7,387)

27,891

–

27,891

28,149

(258)

27,891

38,774

51,828

–

47,639

(1,593)

46,046

46,046

(8,539)

37,507

–

37,507

37,350

157

37,507

48,648

60,794

14,098 **

17,028

26,536

38,774

48,648

28,059 **

30,227

38,518

51,828

60,794

(3.26)

(2.91)

5.52 **

5.25

1.1 **

5.25

–

1.1 **

97.5

(16.3) **

6.94

7.20

6.94

5.25

1.3

5.25

–

1.3

176.25

0.5

10.13

10.13

10.13

5.50

1.8

6.00

–

1.7

234.0

18.7

14.32

14.32

14.32

6.25

2.3

7.00

2.00

2.0

325.0

20.9

*    The comparatives have been restated in respect of discontinued operations.

**   Before operational restructuring and works closure costs, goodwill and intangible asset impairments.

***  EBITA is defined as earnings before interest, tax and amortisation of intangibles. EBITDA is defined as earnings before interest, tax and amortisation of intangibles and depreciation.

18.95

18.95

18.95

9.65

2.0

8.70

3.00

2.2

292.5

18.5

127

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFinancial History – Consolidated Group – continued

Consolidated Balance Sheet 

Non-current assets

Current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Net assets

Net borrowings

Gearing ratio

2012
£’000

2013
£’000

2014
£’000

2015
£’000

2016
£’000

225,882

116,735

342,617

(64,440)

(94,603)

183,574

(63,543)

34.6%

198,082

120,832

318,914

(74,137)

(69,345)

175,432

(35,569)

20.3%

195,951

132,593

328,544

(80,969)

(65,681)

181,894

(30,480)

16.8%

192,815

137,017

329,832

(87,071)

(50,043)

192,718

(11,462)

6.0%

193,393

139,685

333,078

(87,068)

(28,889)

217,121

5,413

(2.5%)

128

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSMarshalls plc Annual Report and Accounts 2016Shareholder Information

Shareholder analysis at 31 December 2016

Size of shareholding

1 to 500

501 to 1,000

1,001 to 2,500

2,501 to 5,000

5,001 to 10,000

10,001 to 25,000

25,001 to 100,000

100,001 to 250,000

250,001 to 500,000

500,001 and above

Number of
shareholders

1,900

525

674

451

281

164

147

65

34

81

%

43.96

12.15

15.59

10.43

6.51

3.79

3.41

1.50

0.79

1.87

Number of
Ordinary Shares

275,462

397,754

1,142,983

1,603,301

1,991,013

2,539,137

7,695,588

9,676,240

12,158,458

161,898,819

4,322

100.00

199,378,755

%

0.14

0.20

0.57

0.80

1.00

1.27

3.86

4.86

6.10

81.20

100.00

Financial calendar
Preliminary announcement of results for the year ended 31 December 2016 
Annual General Meeting 
Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2016  
Half-yearly results for the year ending 31 December 2017 
Half-yearly dividend for the year ending 31 December 2017 
Results for the year ending 31 December 2017 

Announced  

Payable 
Announcement  
Payable  
Announcement  

15 March 2017
10 May 2017
30 June 2017
17 August 2017
6 December 2017
Early March 2018

Advisers
Stockbrokers
Peel Hunt 
Numis Securities Limited

Auditor
Deloitte LLP

Legal advisers
Herbert Smith Freehills LLP
Eversheds LLP
Pinsent Masons LLP

Financial advisers
N M Rothschild & Sons Limited

Bankers
Royal Bank of Scotland plc
Lloyds TSB Bank plc
HSBC Bank plc

Registrars
Computershare Investor Services PLC
The Pavilions
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS99 6ZZ

Shareholders’ enquiries should be addressed to the Registrars at the 
above address (tel: 0870 707 1134).

Registered office
Landscape House
Premier Way 
Lowfields Business Park, Elland 
Halifax HX5 9HT
West Yorkshire

Telephone: 01422 312000

Website: www.marshalls.co.uk

Registered in England and Wales: No. 5100353

129

Annual Report and Accounts 2016 Marshalls plcFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Marshalls plc, Landscape House, 
Premier Way, Lowfields Business Park, 
Elland HX5 9HT

The Group's commitment to environmental issues is reflected in this 
Annual Report which has been printed on Symbol Freelife Satin which is 
a mixed source FSC® certified and ECF (Elemental Chlorine Free) material. 
This is a certified CarbonNeutral® publication. Printed in the UK by Park 
Communications, using their environmental printing technology; 
vegetable inks were used throughout. Both the manufacturing mill and the 
printer are registered to the Environmental Management System ISO14001 
and are Forest Stewardship Council® (FSC) chain-of-custody certified.